Mutoh1204 PDF

MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
Full-Colour Inkjet Printer
VJ-1204
Use this manual for the maintenance

Rev. AP-74105 and inspection of machine.
Important Notice VJ-1204 Maintenance Manual
Important Notice
1. For Users in Europe
Important:
This is a Class A product approved for industrial environ-
ments. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case you may be required to take
adequate measures.
2. For Users in the United States

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
3. Trademark Mentioned in this Manual

• MUTOH, ValueJet, VJ-1204 are registered trademarks or product names of MUTOH INDUSTRIES
LTD.
• Centronics and BiCentronics are registered trademarks or product names of Centronics Data Computer
Corporation.
• Windows95, Windows98, Windows98SE, Windows NT4.0, Windows2000, Windows XP, and MS-
DOS are registered trademarks or product names of Microsoft Corporation.
• Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
• Other company and product names may be registered trademarks or product names.
• No part of this product or publication may be reproduced, copied, or

transmitted in any form or by any means, except for personal use,
without the permission of MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD.
• The product and the contents of this publication may be changed
without prior notification.
• MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. has made the best efforts to keep this
publication free from error, but if you find any uncertainties or
misprints, please call us or the shop where you bought this equipment.
• MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. shall not be liable for any damages or
troubles resulting from the use of this equipment or this manual.
(1)
VJ-1204 Maintenance Manual Warranty Limitations
Warranty Limitations
1. MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. warrants part repair or replacement as a sole measure only if a failure is
found in the system or in the materials and workmanship of the product the seller produced.
However, if the cause of failure is uncertain, decide the action after due mutual consultation.
2. The warranty shall not apply to any direct or indirect loss, or compensation for the loss due to the product
that has been subject to misuse, neglect, or improper alternation.
(2)
About this Manual VJ-1204 Maintenance Manual
About this Manual
1. Purpose and Target Readers

This manual explains preparations needed before maintaining and checking operations for MUTOH Full
Color Ink Jet Printer (VJ-1204).
This manual is prepared for the maintenance personnel of this printer.
Before using this printer, fully understand the contents and directions in this manual.
2. Manual Configuration
Section Contents
1 Safety Instructions Explains types of warnings, cautions and warnings labeled on the printer
for the both operators of the printer and maintenance personnel.
2 Product Overview Explains the features, part names, and functions of the printer.
3 Specifications Explains the specifications of the printer.
4 Parts Replacement Explains the procedures of replacement and removal of the service parts
of the printer.
5 Self-Diagnostic Mode Explains the self-diagnostic functions of the printer.
6 Maintenance Mode Explains the maintenance mode of the printer.
7 Adjustment Explains the adjusting procedures of the printer parts.
8 Maintenance Explains daily maintenance of the printer.
9 Troubleshooting Explains troubles that may occur when using the printer and how to
solve them.
10 Appendix Explains the maintenance information and the exploded views for this
printer.
Use the built-in self-diagnostic program to locate a defective part and adjust/
check during maintenance.
(3)
VJ-1204 Maintenance Manual About this Manual
3. Manual Notation
The following symbols are used in this manual for easier understanding of the information.
Symbol Meaning
Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury
WARNING
Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

CAUTION your equipment
Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the

NOTE product
Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the equipment

TIP
Indicates reference pages in this manual
(4)
VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual
General Table of Contents
1 Safety Instructions
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.4.1 Handling the Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.4.2 Locations and Types of Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.5 Operation Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1.5.1 Handling the Operation Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5.2 Locations and Types of Operation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
2 Product Overview
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3 Part Names and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.3.1 Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3.2 Rear Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.3 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4 Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2.4.1 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.4.2 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.4.3 Self-Diagnosis Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.4.4 Maintenance Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
3 Specifications
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.3.1 USB Interface Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.2 Network Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
40
3.4 Options/Supplies List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.4.1 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.4.2 Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.5 Choosing a Place for the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
4 Parts Replacement
4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2 Removal of Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.2 Removing Operation Panel Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.2.5 Removing Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.6 Removing Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.2.7 Removing Media Guide F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.3 Replacement of Board Base Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

4.3.1 Removing Connector Panel and Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.3.4 Replacing HEATER CONT board assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.3.5 Replacing HEATER RELAY board assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.3.6 Replacing Power Board Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.3.7 Replacing Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.3.8 Replacing Inlet Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4 Replacement of PF Driving Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.4.1 Replacing PF Motor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.4.2 Replacing PF_ENC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.4.3 Replacing PF_ENC Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.4.4 Replacing Heater and Thermistor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.5 Replacement of CR Driving Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

4.5.1 CR Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.5.2 Replacing CR_HP Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.5.3 Replacing Lever Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.5.4 Replacing T Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.5.5 Replacing CR Driven Pulley. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.5.6 Replacing Pressure Arm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
41
4.6 Replacement of Head Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

4.6.1 Replacing Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.6.2 Replacing Cutter Holder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.7 Replacement of Maintenance Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

4.7.1 Removing Maintenance Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4.7.2 Replacing Pump Cap Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.7.3 Replacing Cleaner Head (Cleaning Wiper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.7.4 Replacing Flushing Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4.8 Replacement of Ink Supply Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

4.8.1 Replacing Ink Holder (I/H) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.8.2 Replacing Ink Sensor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.8.3 Replacing Cover Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.8.4 Replacing Heater Junction Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4.9 Replacement of Frame Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

4.9.1 Replacing Suction Fan Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4.9.2 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.10 Replacement of Cable Guide Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

4.10.1 Replacing CR Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.10.2 Replacing Ink Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.10.3 Replacing CR Tape Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
5 Self-Diagnosis Mode
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.2 Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.5 Inspection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

5.5.1 Memory Size Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.5.2 Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5.3 Operation Panel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.5.4 Sensor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.5.5 Encoder Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.5.6 Fan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
42
5.5.7 History Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

5.5.8 Head Waveform Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.6 Ink Charging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.7 Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

5.7.1 Head Nozzle Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.7.2 Skew Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.7.3 Head Slant Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.7.4 Voltage Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.7.5 Uni-D / Bi-D Low Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D High Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.7.7 Side Margin Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.7.8 Test Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.7.9 HeadWash Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5.7.12 Solid Print Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.8 Cleaning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.9 Sample Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.10 Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.11 Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.12 Servo Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.13 Endurance Running Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5.13.3 Wiper Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.13.4 Pump Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.13.5 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.13.6 General Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5.13.7 Endurance Running Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
5.14 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

5.15 ExControl Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5.15.1 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5.15.2 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.15.3 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
5.15.4 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
43
5.16 PaperInitial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
6 Maintenance Mode
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.2.1 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.3 Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6.3.1 Counter Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3.3 Counter Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3.4 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
7 Adjustment
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2 Adjustment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 Working with Dedicated Network Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

7.3.1 Parameter Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3.2 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3.3 Required Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.4 Receiving Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.3.5 Firmware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.3.6 Sending Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.3.7 Sub Controller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.3.8 RTC Date & Time Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.4 PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

7.4.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.4.2 Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.5 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

7.6 CR Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.7 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.8 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7.9 Cutter Holder Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

7.9.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
44
7.10 PG Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

7.10.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.11 Media Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

7.11.1 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.11.2 P_REAR Sensor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
8 Maintenance
8.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Periodical Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3 Part Life Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.4 Lubrication/Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.5 Transportation of Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9.2.1 Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.2 Errors with Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.3 Data Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.2.4 Command Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.2.5 Errors Requiring Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9.2.6 Error Messages During File Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

9.3.1 Initial Operation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.3.2 Media Feed Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9.3.3 Printing Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9.3.4 Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
9.3.5 Online Function Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9.3.6 Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
9.3.7 Problems in Using Dedicated Network Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
10 Appendix
10.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
45
10.3 Maintenance Part List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.4 Jigs and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

10.4.1 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.5 Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
46
47
VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual 1 Safety Instructions
1 Safety Instructions
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 1- 2
1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes.............................................................. 1- 2
1.3 Important Safety Instructions ................................................................ 1- 3
1.4 Warning Labels ....................................................................................... 1- 6
1.4.1 Handling the Warning Labels......................................................... 1-6
1.4.2 Locations and Types of Warning Labels........................................ 1-7
1.5 Operation Labels..................................................................................... 1- 9
1.5.1 Handling the Operation Labels ...................................................... 1-9
1.5.2 Locations and Types of Operation Labels ................................... 1-10
1-1
1 Safety Instructions VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual
1.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the meaning of safety terms for personnel who installs, operates, or maintains this
equipment, important safety instructions, and the warning labels attached to the equipment.
WARNING
Make sure to follow all instructions and warnings on this manual when installing, operating,
or maintaining the equipment.
1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Safety terms in this manual and the contents of warning labels attached to the printer are categorized into the
following three types depending on the degree of risk (or the scale of accident).
Read the following explanations carefully, and follow the instructions in this manual.
Table 1-1 Safety Terms Descriptions

Safety terms Details
Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury
WARNING
Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

DANGER
whole or part of the product
Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the
NOTE product
1-2
1.3 Important Safety Instructions

General safety instructions that must be observed to use the equipment safely are explained below.
WARNING
• Do not place the printer in the following areas. Doing so may result in the printer tipping
or falling over and causing injury.
• Unstable surfaces
• Angled place
• Areas subject to vibration by other equipment
• Do not stand on or place heavy objects on your printer. Doing so may result in the printer
tipping or falling over and causing injury.
• Do not cover the ventilation hole of your printer with cloth, such as a blanket or table cloth.
Doing so could obstruct ventilation and cause fire.
• Do not place the printer in humid and dusty areas. Doing so may result in electrical shock
or fire.
• Make sure to use the power cable packed with the printer you purchased. Not doing so
may result in electrical shock or fire.
• Make sure that the following is performed before parts replacement.
• Turn off the power of the printer.
• Remove the power cable from the power outlet.
Not doing so may cause electric shock or damage to the electric circuit.
• Unplug the cables connected to the printer.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the printer.
1-3
CAUTION
• Assembling and disassembling of the printer are possible only for the parts that
disassembling procedures are shown in this manual. Do not disassemble any frame parts
or parts that disassembling procedures are not shown in this manual.
Doing so may cause trouble that cannot be restored, as the printer is originally assembled
in the factory with a high accuracy of 1/100 mm.
• Do not touch the elements on the circuit board with bare hands.
Doing so may cause static electricity and break the elements.
• Do not press the transparent film on the damper assembly with your hands. Doing so may
discharge the ink filled inside the damper assembly.
• Be careful not to damage the transparent film on the damper assembly.
• Do not touch the nozzles of the print head. Make sure that the nozzles do not get any dust.
• There are some remaining ink in the tubes. Be careful that the ink is not spilled from the
tube outlet onto the printer or items close to the printer.
• If you need to operate the printer with the cover removed for maintenance, be careful not
to get hurt by the driving parts.
• Never lube the printer mechanism with lube other than that designated by MUTOH. Doing
so may damage the parts or shorten the lifetime.
• If the power board assembly needs to be removed, remove the power cable and wait for
5 minutes or more before taking it out; this will discharge the residual electrical charge of
the electrolytic capacitor.
Touching the board before the capacitor discharges may cause electric shock.
• When connecting or removing an FFC type cable on a main board assembly connector,
make sure to connect or remove the cable perpendicular to the connector.
Connecting or removing at a slant angle may damage, break or shortcircuit the inner
terminal of the connector. That may damage the elements on the board.
• When connecting or removing an FFC type cable on the CR board assembly connector,
make sure to connect or remove the cable perpendicular to the connector.
Connecting or removing at a slant angle may damage, break or shortcircuit the inner
terminal of the connector. That may damage the elements on the board.
• Make sure the followings when performing cutter endurance operation.
• Install usable ink cartridges.
• Make sure media initialization is finished.
Performing cutter endurance operation without an ink cartridge may make the cutter go
down beyond the cutting range and damage the product.
• Make sure the power of the printer is OFF before performing the parameter backup.
Performing the parameter backup with the power ON may damage the main board or the
data may not be installed properly.
• Make sure the power of the printer is OFF before installing the firmware. Installing the
firmware with the power ON may damage the main board assembly or the data may not
be properly installed.
1-4
• Make sure there is sufficient space around the printer when performing maintenance
work.
• Maintenance must be done by more than two person for the following work.
• When disassembling or reassembling the product and the optional stand
• When packing the printer for transportation
1-5
1.4 Warning Labels

The handling, attachment locations, and types of warning labels are explained below.
Warning labels are attached to areas where care should be taken. Read and understand the positions and
contents thoroughly before maintenance operation.
1.4.1 Handling the Warning Labels

Make sure to note the following when handling the warning labels.
NOTE
• Make sure that all warning labels can be recognized. If text or illustrations cannot be seen clearly,
clean or replace the label.
• When cleaning warning labels, use a cloth with water or neutral detergent. Do not use a solvent or
gasoline.
• If a warning label is damaged, lost, or cannot be recognized, replace the label.
1-6
1.4.2 Locations and Types of Warning Labels

The locations of warning labels are shown below.
2 1
4 5 6
Table 1-2 List of Warning Labels

No. Warning label type
1 (T fence handling caution)
1-7
Table 1-2 List of Warning Labels

No. Warning label type
2 (Front cover open/close caution)
3 (High temperature caution)
4 (Waste fluid box full caution)
5 (Ink replacement caution)
6 (Scroller desorption caution)
1-8
1.5 Operation Labels

This chapter describes the operation labels including their types and attaching positions.
The operation labels are attached on the product to provide the brief instructions for the particularly important
operations. Learn the instructions and the attaching positions before operation.
1.5.1 Handling the Operation Labels

Make sure to note the following when handling the operation labels.
NOTE
• Make sure that all operation labels can be recognized. If text or illustrations cannot be seen clearly,
clean or replace the label.
• When cleaning operation labels, use a cloth with water or neutral detergent. Do not use a solvent
or gasoline.
• If an operation label is damaged, lost, or cannot be recognized, replace the label.
1-9
1.5.2 Locations and Types of Operation Labels

The locations of operation labels are shown below.
2 1
Table 1-3 List of Operation Labels

No. Operation label type
1 (Roll media setting)
"Operation manual" Setting Roll Media
1-10
Table 1-3 List of Operation Labels(Continued)

No. Operation label type
2 (if not using for a long time)
If the printer is not used

for a longer period, make
sure to push the media
loading lever backward.
"Operation manual" Turning Off The Power
3 (Ink arrangement)
"Operation manual" Replacing Ink Cartridges
1-11
1-12
VJ-1204 Maintenance Manual 2 Product Overview
2 Product Overview
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 2- 2
2.2 Features ................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.3 Part Names and Functions..................................................................... 2- 3
2.3.1 Front Section ................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.2 Rear Section .................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.3 Operation Panel ............................................................................. 2-6
2.4 Plotter Status........................................................................................... 2- 9
2.4.1 Normal ........................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.2 Setup Menu ................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.3 Self-Diagnosis Function ................................................................. 2-9
2.4.4 Maintenance Mode ........................................................................ 2-9
2-1
2 Product Overview VJ-1204 Maintenance Manual
2.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the features, part names, and functions of the printer.
2.2 Features
The features of the printer are explained below.
(1) Fast Prnt

This model uses the new head prints images faster.
Realizing printing width of 1219 mm in uni-direction printing mode and of 1200 mm in bi- direction printing
mode.
(2) Variety of Print Media

The print head machanism makes it possible to use variety of print media, especially in it’s thickness, so that
this model can print on the media of which thickness is betweenn 0.08 to 1.0 mm.
(3) Vivid Color Reproduction

For Vivid color reproduction, this model has high-capacity (220 ml) 4 color ink cartridges with exclusive
smart IC chip on it. With the IC chip, you can manage the ink level of the cartridges and can get better
productivity.
Also, With variable dot mechanism, this model enhances the level of color expression.
(4) Multi-Heater System

The media-heating system which have been equipped to PJ series is changed to match the solvent ink. There
are 3 heaters on Pre / Platen / After positions and improved the ink fixability and drying property.
(5) Effective Utilization of Media

The JOG function for setting print start position on purpose is equipped. You can print on the margin(s) of a
media which is already printed.
2-2
2.3 Part Names and Functions

Part names and functions are explained below.
NOTE
For the directions described in this document, refer to the following figure.
Upper
Rear
Left
Right
Front
Lower
2-3
2.3.1 Front Section
3 2
7
8
Table 2-1 Part Names and Functions of Front Section

No. Name Function
1 Media set lever This lever is used to fix or release the media.
2 Operation panel This panel is used to set operational conditions, the status of the printer,
and other functions.
3 Front cover This cover keeps the operator safe from the drive parts of the printer while
it is operating.This is opened/closed when replacing the cutter or paper is
jammed.This should be closed during normal use.
4 Waste fluid box This box is used to store waste ink discharged from print head.
5 Stand This stand is used to set the printer on the level surface of the floor.
6 Book holder This holder is used to store printed guide such as Quick Reference Guide.
7 Media Guide This guide is used to feed media smoothly when setting media and
printing.
8 Media cut guide This guide groove is used to cut printed media straight.
2-4
2.3.2 Rear Section
K C M
Y
6 4 2 3
Table 2-2 Part Names and Functions of Rear Section

No. Name Function
1 AC inlet For inserting the power cable plug.
2 USB cable connector Connector to connect USB cable.
3 Network interface Connector to connect a network interface cable.
connector
4 Scroller receiver The scroller is set here when using roll media.
5 Media feed slot Insert media from here when feeding media.
6 Ink cartridge slot This holds the ink cartridge.
2-5
2.3.3 Operation Panel

The operation panel is used to set operational conditions, display the status of the printer, and set other
functions.
The names and functions of the operation keys and status lamps are explained below.
TIP
Operation manual
8, 9 10
17
13
14 㧝㧞㧟㧠㧡㧢㧣㧤㧥㧜㧝㧞㧟㧠㧡㧢㧣㧤㧥㧜 15
16
11
6
12
1
5
3 4 7 2
2-6
(1) Operation Keys
NOTE
Some keys have multiple functions and names depending on the printer status (normal or setup menu
display). See "2.4 Plotter Status" p.2-9 for more details.
No. Name Normal Setup menu display

1 [Menu] key Changes the LCD monitor display to Changes the setup menu display
setup menu status. status to normal status.
2 [Enter] key - - Selects the menu to be set and shifts
to the next hierarchy.
- Determines and saves the parameter
value.
[Cleaning] key If held down for 2 seconds or more, -
starts cleaning the printer head.
3 [Cancel] key - During plotting: Terminates printing - Returns to the previous menu
forcibly and deletes 1 file of hierarchy. Changed parameter values
remaining data. are disabled.
- During reception/analysis: Deletes - Changes the setup menu display
the data that has been already status to normal status.
received/analyzed and ignores 1 file
of data received after that.
- During ink drying time wait status:
Releases the ink drying time wait
status and ejects the media.
4 [<] key Sets the media type. -Changes the setting value in the
- The lamp for the type that is set following menu:
lights on (green). • Origin setting menu
[Nozzle Check] key If held down for 2 seconds or more, -
starts checking the printer nozzle.
5 [>] key Sets the plot mode and color mode. Changes the menu in forward order.
- The lamp for the plot mode and
color mode that is set lights on
(green).
6 [Backward ↑ ] key Feeds the media in the reverse -
direction.
[ + ] key - -Changes the menu in forwad order.
-Changes the setting value in forward
order.
-Increases the value when inputting
setting value.
2-7
No. Name Normal Setup menu display

7 [Forward ↓ ] key Feeds the media in the forward -
direction.
[ - ] key - - Changes the setting value in the
reverse direction.
- Decreases the value when inputting
values.
8 [Power] key Turns the printer on and off. Turns the printer on and off.
(2) LCD Monitor and Status Lamps
No. Name Color Status Function

9 Power lamp Green On The printer is switched on.
Blinking An error has occurred. The contents will be displayed on the
LCD monitor.
Off The printer is switched off.
10 Data lamp Red On - The printer is analyzing received data.
- The printer is printing data.
Blinking The printer is receiving data.
Off The printer is not receiving, analyzing or printing data.
11 High lamp Green On The print head hight is set to High position.
Off The print head hight is set to Low position.
12 Low lamp Green On The print head hight is set to Low position.
Off The print head hight is set to High position.
13 Wave lamp Red On The effect menu is set to Wave.
Off The effect menu is set to either Fine or SuperFine.
14 Fine & S.Fine Red On The effect menu is set to either Fine or SuperFine.
lamp
Off The effect menu is set to Wave.
15 Strong lamp Green On - The cleaning mode is set to Strong.
- When the Normal lamp is also on, the cleaning mode is set
to Economy.
Off The cleaning mode is set to Normal.
16 Normal lamp Green On - The cleaning mode is set to Normal.
- When the Strong lamp is also on, the cleaning mode is set
to Economy quality.
Off The cleaning mode is set to Strong.
17 LCD monitor - - This monitor displays the operation status and error
messages of the printer.
2-8
2.4 Printer Status

The status of the printer is explained below.
2.4.1 Normal
Indicates that the printer can print when media is loaded.
Each setup concerning printing can be operated by using operation panel.
TIP
Operation manual
2.4.2 Setup Menu

Each setup concerning printing can be operated by using operation panel.
The settings required for normal printing are usually made on the printer driver or application, but can also
be made using the operation panel.
TIP
Operation manual
2.4.3 Self-Diagnosis Function

Indicates that each settings concerning printing using the operation panel. Names and functions of the
operation panel keys are the same as those of setup menu display.
TIP
"5 Self-Diagnosis Mode" p.5-1
2.4.4 Maintenance Mode

Indicates that each setup concerning to the life counter on this printer can be operated by using the operation
panel. Names and functions of the operation panel keys are the same as those of setup menu display.
TIP
"6 Maintenance Mode" p.6-1
2-9
2-10
VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual 3 Specifications
3 Specifications
3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 3- 2
3.2 Product Specifications ........................................................................... 3- 2
3.3 Interface Specifications.......................................................................... 3- 4
3.3.1 USB Interface Specifications ........................................................ 3-4
3.3.2 Network Interface Specifications.................................................... 3-5
3.4 Options/Supplies List ............................................................................. 3- 5
3.4.1 Options .......................................................................................... 3-5
3.4.2 Supplies ......................................................................................... 3-5
3.5 Choosing a Place for the Plotter .......................................................... 3- 6
3-1
3 Specifications VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual
3.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the specifications of the product, optional parts, and supplies. Installation environment
requirements are also explained.
3.2 Product Specifications

(1) Main Unit Specifications
Item Specifications
Model name VJ-1204
Plotting method On-demand piezo drive
Motor driving method Firmware servo/DC motor drive
Media feeding method Multi-point pressure grid roller method
Media fixing method Pressurizing roller manual-down method
Media supply and Roll media

Front feeding/front paper ejection
ejection
Media type Tracing paper, plain paper, film, coated paper, glossy paper
Roll media outer 2-inch 150 mm or less

diameter
3-inch 150 mm or less
Maximum Roll media

loadable media 19 kg (41.9 lb) or less
weight
Maximum media width 1300 mm (4.3 in.)
Maximum plot Roll media

18 m (59.1 ft.)
length
Maximum plot length 1200 mm (3.9 in.)
Plotting margins Roll media Top: 3mm, Bottom: 3mm, Left:3mm, Right: 3mm
Media cutting method Manual cut
Head height adjustment 2 levels: PG Low 1.5mm / PG High 2.3mm
Distance accuracy The larger value either ± 0.25 mm or ± 0.1% of moving distance
• Used media: Roll MF-3G
• Plot length: 1219 mm (4 ft.)
• Operating temperature: 22 to 30ºC (71.6 to 86F)
• Operating humidity: 40 to 60%
• PG: Low
• Plot mode: Graphics1
Right angle accuracy ±0.1mm or less against the moving distance (500.0mm)
• Used media: Roll MF-3G
• Operating temperature: 22 to 30ºC (71.6 to 86F)
• Operating humidity: 40 to 60%
• Plot mode: Graphics1
3-2
Item Specifications
CPU 64Bit RISC CPU
Memory 128MB
Command MH-RTL (RTL-PASS)
Interface • USB
(USB 1.1/2.0 is supported)
• Network Interface (IEEE802.3)
After heater OFF / 30 to 50°C (86 to 122F)
Platen heater OFF / 30 to 50°C (86 to 122F)
Pre heater OFF / 30 to 50°C (86 to 122F)
Ink Supply method Tube supply from separate four seperated cartridges
Cartridge Black, cyan, magenta, yellow: 220ml ± 5ml for each color
Head life expectancy 60 billion dots per nozzle (in case of sequence discharging under the condition
of the temperature of 25ºC (77F) with no dust)
Environmental conditions Temperature Humidity

Operation environment 20ºC (68F) to 30ºC (86F) 40% to 60%, with no
condensation
Plotting accuracy warranty range 22ºC (71.6F) to 30ºC (86F) 40% to 60%, with no
condensation
Rate of change 2ºC/hour or less 5%/hour or less
Storage Without ink -20ºC (-4F) to 60ºC (140F) 20% to 80%, with no
environment condensation
With ink -10ºC (14F) to 40ºC (104F) 20% to 80%, with no
condensation
Power source Voltage AC 100 - 120V ± 10%, AC 200 - 240V ± 10%
Frequency 50Hz/60Hz ± 1Hz
Power During Plotting 1300W or less
consumption
During standby 40W or less
Outer dimensions Height 978mm (38.5 in.) * including stand
Width 1766 mm (69.5 in.)
Depth 685 mm (27 in.)
Weight Main body 51.6 kg (113.7 lb.)
Stand 16 kg (35.2 lb.)
3-3
3.3 Interface Specifications

This section explains the specification of the interfaces Supported for this printer.
3.3.1 USB Interface Specifications

Item Specifications
Interface Universal Serial Bus Specifications Revision 2.0
Universal Serial Bus Device Class Definition for Plotting Devices Version 1.1
Data format NRZI
Transmission speed 11Mbps (USB1.1) / 480Mbps (USB2.0)
Applicable connector USB Series B
Allowable cable length 3 m
Pin number Signal name Input/output Function

1 VCC - Cable power supply
2 - Data Bidirectional Data
3 + Data Bidirectional Data
4 Ground - Cable ground
3-4
3.3.2 Network Interface Specifications
Item Specifications
Network type Ethernet IEEE802.3
Network I/F 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX Auto-switching
(RJ-45 connector twist pair cable )
MDI / MDI-X Auto-switching
Corresponding TCP/IP, ARP, RARP, ICMP
protcol
3.4 Options/Supplies List

3.4.1 Options
Name Model Sales units

Scroller / Flange diameter: 2 in. (for VJ-1204) VJ12-SR 1 box (1 piece per
box)
Flange spacer / 3-inch spacer RJ9-FS03 1 box (2 pieces per
box)
TIP
The scroller is supplied with the movable media stopper.
3.4.2 Supplies
(1) Ink Cartridges

Ink cartridge K (Black) VJ-MSINK3-BK220 1 box (1 piece per box)
Ink cartridge C (Cyan) VJ-MSINK3-CY220 1 box (1 piece per box)
Ink cartridge M (Magenta) VJ-MSINK3-MA220 1 box (1 piece per box)
Ink cartridge Y (Yellow) VJ-MSINK3-LC220 1 box (1 piece per box)
3-5
(2) Other Supplies

Waste ink tank VJ12-HEB Waste Box 1 box (1 piece per box)
Cleaining fluid VJ22-HEINK-CL 220 ml
Flashing Box adhesive material VJ12-FB-S03 -
3.5 Choosing a Place for the Printer

WARNING
• Do not place the printer in a location under the following conditions. Doing so may cause
the product to fall, become damaged, or cause injury.
• Unstable surfaces
• Slanted areas
• Locations that are subject to vibration from other product
• Do not stand on the printer or place any heavy objects on it.
Doing so may cause it to fall over, become damaged, or cause injury.
• Do not cover the ventilation hole of the printer with cloth, such as a blanket or table cloth.
Doing so could prevent the printer from ventilating and cause fire.
• Keep the printer away from humid and dusty areas. Failure to do so may result in
electrical shock or fire.
(1) Installation Environment Requirements

Choose a place for printer installation following the requirements of the table below.
Table 3-1 Installation Environment Requirements List

Installation space 5m2 or more, 2.6m or more is required for the width
Floor loading capability 2940Pa (300kgf/m2) or over
Electrical Voltage AC 100 V - 120 V ± 10% or AC 200 V - 240 V ± 10%
specifications
Frequency 50/60Hz ± 1Hz
Capacity 11.5A or more
Environmental conditions Temperature Humidity
Operation 20º C (68F) to 32ºC (86F) 40% to 60%, with no condensation
environment
Plotting accuracy 22ºC (71.6F) to 30ºC (86F) 40% to 60%, with no condensation
warranty range
Rate of change 2ºC/hour or less 5%/hour or less
3-6
NOTE
Avoid the following temperature and humidity conditions. Otherwise, Plotted images may appear
differently from what you expect.
• Places where sudden changes in temperature and humidity are expected, even though the condition
is within the range specified
• Places where direct sunlight or excessive lighting are expected
• Places where air conditioners blow directly
MUTOH recommends that the printer should be installed where air conditioning can be adjusted
easily.
(2) Required Space

Install the printer on a flat surface that fulfills the following conditions.
• The place to install printer with the optional stand should have enough loading capacity.
NOTE
For the printer and the optional stand, refer to"3.2 Product Specifications" p.3-2.
a=180mm (7.1 in.)

b=450mm (17.7 in.)
c=480mm (18.9 in.)
d=300mm (11.8 in.)
e=1198mm (47.2 in.)
㨑
㨐
㨍
㨏
㨎
* Do not use VJ-1204 without stand.
3-7
3-8
VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual 4 Parts Replacement
4 Parts Replacement
4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 4- 4
4.2 Removal of Covers ................................................................................. 4- 6
4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover ................................................................ 4-7
4.2.2 Removing Operation Panel Unit .................................................... 4-9
4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover ............................................................... 4-10
4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover................................................. 4-11
4.2.5 Removing Front Cover................................................................. 4-12
4.2.6 Removing Top Cover ................................................................... 4-13
4.2.7 Removing Media Guide F ............................................................ 4-14
4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2.......................................................... 4-15
4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R) .............................................. 4-15
4.3 Replacement of Board Base Section Components ........................... 4- 17
4.3.1 Removing Connector Panel and Cooling Fan.............................. 4-17
4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket .................................................... 4-18
4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly ................................................. 4-21
4.3.4 Replacing HEATER CONT board assembly................................ 4-22
4.3.5 Replacing HEATER RELAY board assembly .............................. 4-25
4.3.6 Replacing Power Board Assembly............................................... 4-27
4.3.7 Replacing Fuse ............................................................................ 4-28
4.3.8 Replacing Inlet Assembly............................................................. 4-29
4.4 Replacement of PF Driving Section Components ............................. 4- 31
4.4.1 Replacing PF Motor Assembly..................................................... 4-31
4.4.2 Replacing PF_ENC Assembly ..................................................... 4-33
4-1
4 Parts Replacement VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual
4.4.3 Replacing PF_ENC Scale ............................................................ 4-34
4.4.4 Replacing Heater and Thermistor................................................. 4-34
4.5 Replacement of CR Driving Section Components .............................4- 38
4.5.1 CR Motor Assembly...................................................................... 4-38
4.5.2 Replacing CR_HP Sensor ............................................................ 4-39
4.5.3 Replacing Lever Sensor ............................................................... 4-40
4.5.4 Replacing T Fence ....................................................................... 4-41
4.5.5 Replacing CR Driven Pulley ......................................................... 4-44
4.5.6 Replacing Pressure Arm Assembly .............................................. 4-46
4.6 Replacement of Head Section Components .......................................4- 48
4.6.1 Replacing Print Head.................................................................... 4-48
4.6.2 Replacing Cutter Holder Assembly............................................... 4-52
4.7 Replacement of Maintenance Section Components ..........................4- 57
4.7.1 Removing Maintenance Base Assembly ...................................... 4-57
4.7.2 Replacing Pump Cap Assembly ................................................... 4-61
4.7.3 Replacing Cleaner Head (Cleaning Wiper) .................................. 4-63
4.7.4 Replacing Flushing Box Assembly ............................................... 4-64
4.8 Replacement of Ink Supply Section Components..............................4- 66
4.8.1 Replacing Ink Holder (I/H) Assembly............................................ 4-66
4.8.2 Replacing Ink Sensor Assembly................................................... 4-68
4.8.3 Replacing Cover Sensor Assembly .............................................. 4-70
4.8.4 Replacing Heater Junction Board Assembly ................................ 4-71
4.9 Replacement of Frame Section Components .....................................4- 73
4.9.1 Replacing Suction Fan Assembly................................................. 4-73
4-2
4.9.2 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly......................................... 4-74
4.10 Replacement of Cable Guide Section Components .......................... 4- 75
4.10.1 Replacing CR Board Assembly.................................................... 4-75
4.10.2 Replacing Ink Tube ...................................................................... 4-76
4.10.3 Replacing CR Tape Wire ............................................................. 4-79
4-3
4.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on removal and replacement of service parts.
WARNING
Before starting part replacement, always perform the following operations.

• Turn OFF the machine power.
• Remove the power plug from the outlet.
Otherwise, you may suffer electric shock or the system circuit may be damaged.
• Remove any cables connected to the machine.
Otherwise, the machine may be damaged.
CAUTION
The components in the machine can be disassembled only if so instructed in this manual.
Do not disassemble the frame components and other components that are not instructed to
disassemble in the manual.
The machine has been assembled in the MUTOH factory with extremely high precision up
to 1/100mm. If disassembled inappropriately, it may not restore its normal functionality.
NOTE
After replacing any service parts, perform necessary lubrication and bonding following the
instructions in section "8.4 Lubrication/Bonding" p.8-6.
4-4
Upper
Rear
Left
Right
Front
Lower
4-5
4.2 Removal of Covers

Before replacing any service parts in the machine, you must remove some external covers.
This section describes the procedure to remove covers.
1 9
8 (Rear side)
2
7
Table 4-1 Cover Component List

No. Part name
1 L side cover
2 Front cover
3 Media guide F
4 R side cover
5 Waste fluid cassette
6 I/H cover
7 Operation panel unit assembly
8 Media guide R2 (rear side)
9 Top cover
4-6
4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover

1. Move down the pressure lever backward.
No. Part name

1 1 Pressure lever cap
2 Pressure lever cap screw
2 (M4 × 10, P tight binding)
2. Remove the pressure lever cap-retaining screw (M4 × 10, P tight binding: 1).
3. Remove the waste fluid cassette.
No. Part name

1 1 R side cover
2 Waste fluid cassette
2 3 R side cover outer screw
M4 × 8, P tight cup
4. Remove the R side cover outer screw (Tapping screw M4 × 8, S tight cup: 2).
5. Open the front cover.
4-7
6. Remove the R side cover inner screw (tapping screw M4 × 12, P tight binding black: 2).
No. Part name

1 R side cover
1 2 R side cover inner screw
(tapping screw M4 × 12, P tight
2 binding black)
7. Remove the R side cover rear screw (tapping screw M4 × 12, S tight cup: 2).
1
No. Part name
1 R side cover
2
2 R side cover rear screw
(tapping screw M4 × 12, S tight
cup)
8. Return the pressure lever forward and remove the R side cover to the upper right direction.
9. Replace the parts inside the product.
10. To reassemble the unit, reverse the removal procedure.
4-8
4.2.2 Removing Operation Panel Unit
TIP
Before removing the operation panel unit, perform the following work.
• Removing the R side cover: "4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover" p.4-7
• Unlocking and moving the carriage.
1. Remove the operation panel unit tape wire (FFC).
CAUTION
When connecting or removing the tape wire (FFC) to the operation panel unit connector,
always pull or push the wire perpendicularly to the connector. Pulling or pushing the wire
slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the connectors, resulting in a
breakdown of the on-board devices.
2. Release the tab on the rear side of the operation panel unit from the panel stay.
3
1
2
2
Insert a hand from here. rear side

3
No. Part name

1 Operation panel unit
2 Panel stay
3 Operation panel unit-retaining tab
3. Remove the operation panel unit.

4-9
4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover
NOTE
Before removing the L side cover, remove the following part.
• Removing the scroller receiver (L): "4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R)" p.4-15
1. Remove the L side cover front screw (tapping screw M4 × 12, P tight binding black: 2).
1 2
No. Part name
1 L side cover
2 L side cover inner screw
binding black)
2. Remove the L side cover rear screw (tapping screw M4 × 8, S tight cup: 2).
3. Remove the L side cover right screw (tapping screw M4 × 8, S tight cup: 2).
4. Remove the L side cover scroller receiver side screw (tapping screw M4 × 12, P tight binding black: 1).
1
No. Part name
1 L side cover
2
2 L side cover rear screw
(tapping screw M4 × 8, S tight cup)
3 L side cover right screw
4 4 L side cover scroller receiver side
screw (back side)
3 binding black)
5. Remove the L side cover.

4-10
4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover
NOTE
Before removing the ink holder (I/H) cover, remove the following parts.
• L side cover: "4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover" p.4-10
1. Remove the ink cartridge.

2. Remove the I/H cover rear screw (tapping screw M4 × 8, S tight cup: 2).
No. Part name

1 I/H cover
1 2 I/H cover screw
3. Remove the scroller receiver.

"4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R)" p.4-15
4. Remove the I/H cover side (scroller receiver side) screw (tapping screw M4 × 12, P tight binding black:
1).
No. Part name

1 I/H cover
1
2 I/H cover side screw
binding black)
5. Remove the I/H cover.

4-11
4.2.5 Removing Front Cover

2. Remove the front cover by pulling it toward the direction of the arrow shown below.
No. Part name

1 Front cover
2 Front cover receiver
NOTE
Do not remove the front cover by force.It may damage or deform the resin.

4-12
4.2.6 Removing Top Cover
NOTE
Before removing the top cover, remove the following parts.
• Front cover: "4.2.5 Removing Front Cover" p.4-12
1. Remove the top cover front side-retaining screw (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M3
× 5: 2).
1
No. Part name
1 Top cover
2 2 Top cover front side screw
2
(pan-head screw with spring washer
and flat washer M3 × 5)
2. Remove the top cover rear side-retaining screw (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer
M3 × 5: 7).
No. Part name
2 2 1 Top cover
2 Top cover rear side screw
(pan-head screw with spring washer
and flat washer M3 × 5)
1 2
3. Remove the top cover.

4-13
4.2.7 Removing Media Guide F

1. Remove the media guide F lower-side screw (cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3bk: 10).
No. Part name

1 Media guide F
2 2
2 Media guide F screw
(cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3bk)
2. Remove the media guide F top screw (platen-retaining screw NX: 4, cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3bk: 1) and
media guide F right cover and left cover screw (cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3bk: 6).
2
No. Part name
3
1 Media guide F
2 Media guide F top screw
(platen-retaining screw NX)
3 Media guide F right cover and left
cover screw
3 (cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3bk)
3 1
3. Remove the media guide F. In the removing process, remove the after heater AFT_H cable assembly
inside the media guide F, and after thermistor AFT_T cable assembly.
NOTE
The spacers are attached to the media guide F top screws except the center one. When fasten the
screws, attach the spacers.
4-14
4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2

1. Remove the media guide R2-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 11). The number of
screws varies depending on models.
No. Part name

1
1 Rear cover
2 2 Media guide R2-retaining

2
screw
cup)
2. Remove the media guide R2 by pulling it backward.

4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R)

1. Remove the scroller receiver L-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 2).
No. Part name

1 Scroller receiver L screw
cup)
1 2 Scroller receiver L
2. Remove the scroller receiver L.
4-15
3. Remove the scroller receiver L-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 2).
No. Part name

1 Scroller receiver R screw
2 cup)
2 Scroller receiver R
1
4. Remove the scroller receiver R.

4-16
4.3 Replacement of Board Base Section Components

This section describes replacement procedures of power board assembly, main board assembly, network
interface card (NIC), and cooling fan.
CAUTION
When you handle a circuit board, do not touch any elements on it with bare hands.
Doing so may cause electrostatic discharge and damage the elements.
4.3.1 Removing Connector Panel and Cooling Fan
(1) Removing Connector Panel

1. Remove the cooling fan (5V) connector.
2. Remove the cooling fan (5V) cable from the clamp.
3. Remove the connector panel screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S cup: 2).
No. Part name

1 Connector panel
3
2 Connector panel screw
(tapping screw M3 × 6, S)
1
3 Cooling fan (5V)
4. Remove the connector panel.
4-17
(2) Replacing Cooling Fan (5V)

1. Remove the cooling fan (5V) connector.
2. Remove the fan bracket screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S cup: 2).
No. Part name

3
1 Connector panel
2 Fan bracket screw
(tapping screw M3 × 6, S cup)
1 2
3 Cooling fan (5V)
3. Remove the cooling fan screw (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M3 × 20: 2) from the
fan bracket.
4. Replace the cooling fan.
4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket
NOTE
Before replacing the board assemblies, remove the following parts.
• Media guide R2: "4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2" p.4-15
• Connector panel: "4.3.1 Removing Connector Panel and Cooling Fan" p.4-17
1. Remove the following connectors from the main board assembly.
CAUTION
When connecting or removing the FFC type cables to the main board assembly
connector, always pull or push the cables perpendicularly to the connector.
Pulling or pushing the wire slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the
connectors, resulting in a breakdown of the on-board elements.
4-18
Table 4-3 Connectors to Main Board Assembly

No. Connector # of pins Color Connect to Remarks
No.
1 J1 14 White Power board assembly Connected to CN301 by using
DC cable assembly.
2 J5 FFC Black Operation panel unit assembly
3 J9 FFC Black CR board assembly J203 Connected to J203 by using CR
tape wire.
4 J10 FFC Black CR board assembly Connected to J202 by using CR
tape wire.
5 J11 FFC Black CR board assembly Connected to J201 by using CR
tape wire.
6 J12 4 White PF ENC assembly -
7 J14 - - Unused -
8 J15 - - Unused -
9 J16 - - Unused -
10 J17 - - Unused -
11 J20 2 White PF motor assembly -
12 J21 3 White CR motor assembly -
13 J22 4 White Pump motor assembly -
14 J23 - - Unused -
15 J24 3 White CR_ORG sensor -
16 J25 2 White Suction fan 1 assembly -
17 J26 2 Black Suction fan 2 assembly -
18 J27 3 Black Wiper origin sensor -
19 J28 2 Red Suction fan 3 assembly -
20 J29 2 Yellow Suction fan 4 assembly -
21 J30 3 Blue Lever sensor assembly -
22 J28 2 White Cooling fan (5V) assembly -
23 J29 3 Red WASTE (waste fluid) sensor R -
24 J36 2 Red Cooling fan (24V) assembly -
25 J38 3 Yellow Cover R sensor -
26 J40 4 Blue Cover L sensor -
27 J41 - - Unused -
28 J42 4 Black P_REAR sensor -
29 J43 8 - HEATER CONT board -
30 J45 - - Unused -
4-19
Table 4-3 Connectors to Main Board Assembly (Continued)

No. Connector # of pins Color Connect to Remarks
No.
31 J46 4 Natural HEATER CONT board -
color
J14 J16 J12 J32 PANEL TO CR J201

M_INK C FAN1 J5 J11
K_INK PF ENC
J15 J17 J40 J34 TO CR J202
C_INK Y_INK COVER_L C FAN2 J10
J42 J36 TO CR J203

J24 J33 J18
P_REAR_ C FAN3(+24V) J9
CR_ORG W SENSE R REV_INK1 SENS
J27 J35 J19
WIPE_ORG W SENSE L REV_INK2
J30 J37 J41
LEVER SENS REV SENS1 DEBUG
J38 J39
J44
COVER_R REV SENS2
isp JTAG
J4
J2 isp-CLK- JTAG
OPTION IF
MOTOR
SYSTEM
J7
PF
J8
J20
FPGA JTAG
MOTOR
J21
CR
J43
SODIMM 128MB
MAIN Board
PUMP1
PUMP2
J22
J23
SERIAL REV
J3
BLOWER
BLOWER
FAN2
FAN1
J26
J25
POWER SUPPLY
ETHER
BLOWER
BLOWER
FAN4
FAN3
NET
J29
J28
J1
USB IF
J6
J13
2. Remove the cable from the three clamps on the main board bracket.
No. Part name

1 Board bracket
1
2 Clamp
3. Remove the following parts (if needed);

a. AC cable between terminal block and Main board assembly
b. DC cable between Main board assembly and CNT
c. Serial cable assembly between Main board assembly and CNT
4-20
4. Remove the board bracket-retaining screws (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 5).
No. Part name

1 Main board bracket
2 Main board bracket-retaining screw
5. Slide the main board bracket to the right then lift from the front side and remove it.
4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly
NOTE
• When replacing the main board assembly, make sure to back up the parameters by following the
instructions in "7.3.1 Parameter Backup" p.7-8. Otherwise, the life counters on the waste fluid
box or the tube cannot be updated and ink may overflow inside the product.
Perform other adjustments by following the instructions in "7.2 Adjustment Item" p.7-3.
• Before replacing the main board assembly, remove the following parts.
• Board bracket: "4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket" p.4-18
4-21
1. Remove the screws retaining the main board assembly to the board bracket (cup screw M3 × 6: 7)
.
2 No. Part name

1 Main board assembly
2 Main board assembly screw
(cup screw M3 × 6)
2. Replace the main board assembly

4. Input the parameters and install the firmware by following the instructions in "7.3 Working with
Dedicated Network Software" p.7-8.
5. Perform adjustment on media edge sensor and the P_REAR sensor by following the instructions in "7.2
Adjustment Item" p.7-3.
4.3.4 Replacing HEATER CONT board assembly

1. Remove the cable from the five brackets at the top of the HEATER CONT board assembly.
No. Part name

1 Board bracket
2 Clamp
4-22
2. Remove the following connectors from the HEATER CONT board assembly.
Table 4-2 Connectors connected to HEATER CONT board assembly
No. Connector # of Color Connect to Remarks

No. pins
1 J2 - - - Unused
2 J3 - - - Unused
3 J4 - - - Unused
4 J5 - - - Unused
5 J6 FFC - HEATER RELAY board
6 J7 - - - Not equipped
7 J8 4 White HEATER JUNCTION board Connected to J2 by using power

cable assembly between CNT -
JC.
8 J9 Serial - HEATER JUNCTION board Connected to J3 by using serial

cable assembly between MAIN
- CNT.
9 J10 Serial - Main board assembly Connected to assembly J43 by

using serial cable between
MAIN - CNT.
10 J11 - - - Unused
11 J12 - - - Unused
12 J13 - - - Unused
13 J14 - - - Unused
14 J15 - - - Unused
15 J16 - - - Unused
16 J17 - - - Unused
17 J18 - - - Unused
18 J19 8 White Main board assembly Connected to J46 by using

power cable assembly between
MAIN - CNT.
19 J20 - - - Unused
20 J21 - - - Unused
21 J22 2 White Terminal block AC cable between terminal

block and CNT
22 J23 2 White HEATER RELAY AC cable assembly between

CNT - RLY
4-23
3. Replace the following parts;

AC cable assembly between CNT - RLY
Tape wire between CNT - RLY
DC cable assembly between MAIN - CNT
Serial cable between MAIN - CNT
AC cable between CNT - Power unit
DC cable between CNT - Power unit
4. Remove the HEATER CONT board bracket-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 4), and
remove it.
2 1 2
No. Part name

1 HEATER CONT board bracket
2 HEATER CONT board bracket-retaining screw
5. Remove the HEATER CONT board-retaining screw (cup screw M3 × 6 white: 9).
2
No. Part name
1 HEATER CONT board
1 assembly
2 HEATER CONT board
assembly screw
(cup screw M3 × 6 white)
6. Replace the HEATER CONT board assembly.

4-24
4.3.5 Replacing HEATER RELAY board assembly

1. Remove the cable from the five clamps on the top of HEATER CONT board bracket.
No. Part name

2 Clamp
2. Remove the following connectors from the HEATER RELAY board assembly.
Table 4-3 Connectors connected to HEATER RELAY board assembly

No. pins
1 J1 2 White HEATER CONT board Connected to J23 by using AC

cable assembly between CNT -
RLY.
2 J2 7 White Platen heater 1
3 J3 FFC - HEATER CONT board Connected to J6 by using tape

assembly wire between CNT - RLY.
4 J4 2 White AC-IN
5 J5 7 White Platen heater
6 J6 2 White AC-OUT
7 J7 3 White Preheater 1
8 J8 3 White Preheater 2
9 J9 4 White After heater
10 J10 2 Blue Cooling fan
11 J12 2 White Platen thermistor 1
12 J13 2 Black Platen thermistor 2
13 J15 2 Red Pre-thermistor
14 J17 3 White After thermistor
3. Replace the AC cable assembly between CNT-RLY, and RLY_AC cable assembly.
4-25
4. Remove the HEATER CONT board bracket-retaining screws, and remove the board bracket.
2 1 2
No. Part name

2 HEATER CONT board bracket-retaining screw
5. Remove the relay board assembly retaining screws (cup screw M3 × 6 white: 9).
No. Part name

1 Relay board assembly
2 Relay board assembly screw
6. Replace the relay board assembly.

4-26
4.3.6 Replacing Power Board Assembly
CAUTION
• When removing the power board assembly, remove the power cable and wait for at least
5 minutes before taking it out; this will discharge the residual electrical charge of the
electrolytic capacitor.
If you handle these boards before the capacitor charge is fully discharged, you may suffer
electric shock.
• To avoid electric shock, never touch the back of the power board.When handling the
power board, take the side of the board.
• To avoid a short circuit, do not place the power board assembly directly on conductive
objects.
NOTE
Before replacing the power board assembly, remove the following parts.
• Rear cover: "4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2" p.4-15
• Board bracket: "4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket" p.4-18
1. Remove the following connectors from the power board assembly.

Table 4-4 Connectors to Power Board Assembly
No. Connector No. # of pins Color Connect to Remarks
1 CN301 - White Main board assembly Connected to J1 by using DC cable
assembly.
2 CN001 - Terminal block
2. Remove the power board bracket-retaining screw.
2 2
4-27
3. Remove the power board assembly-retaining screw (cup screw M3 × 6 white: 9).
2 No. Part name

1 Power board assembly
2 2 Power board screw

4. Replace the power board assembly.

4.3.7 Replacing Fuse
WARNING
When replacing the fuse, remove the power cable and wait for at least 5 minutes before
taking it out; this will discharge the residual electrical charge of the electrolytic capacitor.
If you handle the fuse before the capacitor charge is fully discharged, you may suffer electric
shock.
CAUTION
Use the Fuse which specification matches as follows.

• Specification: 250V 15A, f10.31mm 38.1mm
• Double pole/ Neutral Fusing
NOTE
Before replacing fuse, remove the following parts.
4-28
1. Remove the fuse-fixing screw (pan-head machine screw M 4 × 8 Ni-3: 1 for each unit),
No. Part name
1 1 Fuse
2 Fuse-fixing screw
(pan-head machine screw M 4 ×
8 Ni-3)
2. Remove the AC cable assembly between noise filter and fuse, and AC cable assembly between fuse and
terminal box.
3. Replace the fuse.
4.3.8 Replacing Inlet Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing the inlet assembly, remove the following parts.
(1) Removing Cooling Fan (24V)

1. Remove the screw retaining the cooling fan (24V) (pan-head machine screw M 4 × 30: 2).
No. Part name

1 Cooling fan (24V) screw
(pan-head machine screw M 4 ×
30)
2 Cooling fan (24V)
4-29
2. Remove the cooling fan (24V) cable connector.
No. Part name

1 Cooling fan (24V) connector
3. Replace the cooling fan.

TIP
• When reassembling the cooling fan, spread the fan seal (shown in the diagram below) under the
fan, then screw the fan on it
No. Part name

1 Fan seal
• Installation direction of the cooling fan assembly (sealing surface and cable pulling direction) is
specified. Install it with the sealing surface facing up.
(2) Replacing Inlet Assembly

1. Remove the connectors from the inlet assembly.
2. Remove the inlet assembly-retaining screw (countersunk head screw M3 × 6 white: 2).
4-30
1
No. Part name
1 Inlet assembly connector
2 Inlet assembly
2
3 Inlet assembly screw
(countersunk head screw M3 ×
6 white)
3. Replace the inlet assembly

TIP
When installing the inlet assembly, match the corresponding color connectors.
4.4 Replacement of PF Driving Section Components

4.4.1 Replacing PF Motor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the PF motor assembly, remove the following covers.
4-31
1. Remove the PF motor assembly connectors out through the PF motor cable assembly.
1
No. Part name
1 PF motor cable
2 PF motor assembly connector
2. Remove the screw retaining the PF motor to the PF bracket (M4 × 8 pan-head screw with spring washer
and flat washer: 2).
No. Part name

1 PF bracket:
2 PF motor screw
1
(M4 × 8 pan-head screw with
spring washer and flat washer)
3 PF speed reduction belt
2 3
3. Replace the PF motor assembly.

NOTE
Move the PF speed reduction pulley with your hand to check if the PF speed reduction belt is equally
balanced on the pulley center section of the PF motor assembly.
5. Perform adjustments by following the instructions in "7.2 Adjustment Item" p.7-3.
4-32
4.4.2 Replacing PF_ENC Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the PF_ENC assembly, remove the following covers.
1. Remove the PF_ENC assembly connectors from the main board assembly.
2. Take the PF_ENC assembly cable off the clamp, then pull it out through the L frame cable inlet.
3. Remove the PF_ENC assembly-retaining screw (tapping screw M2 × 5: 2).
No. Part name

1 Clamp
3
2 PF_ENC assembly screw
(tapping screw M2 × 5)
3 PF_ENC assembly
1 2
4. Replace the PF_ENC assembly.

4-33
4.4.3 Replacing PF_ENC Scale
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the PF_ENC scale assembly, remove the following parts.
1. Remove the ENC holder-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, P tight cup).
No. Part name

1 ENC holder screw
1 (tapping screw M3 × 6, P tight
cup)
2 PF_ENC scale
2
3 ENC holder
1 3
2. Replace the PF scale.

NOTE
When handling the PF scale, note the following.
• Do not damage or bend the PF scale. Do not touch the peripheral surface of the PF scale.
• Make sure that no double-sided tape remains on the slit mounting flange.
4.4.4 Replacing Heater and Thermistor Assembly
(1) Replacing After Heater

1. Remove the media guide F.
"4.2.7 Removing Media Guide F" p.4-14
2. Remove the connectors from both AFT_H relay assembly and AFT_T relay assembly.
4-34
3. Remove the after heater and thermistor.
No. Part name

1 After heater
2 Thermistor assembly
(2) Replacing Platen Heater

1. Remove the suction FAN mounting plate.
"4.9.1 Replacing Suction Fan Assembly" p.4-73
2. Remove the connectors for PLT_H1 assembly and PLT_H2 assembly, which is the far side of the suction
FAN mounting plate.
3. Remove the media guide F.
"4.2.7 Removing Media Guide F" p.4-14
4. Remove the screws fixing platen stay F and platen stay R (hexagon socket screw with spring washer and
flat washer M3 × 6 Ni-3: 6).

No. Part name
1 Platen stay R screw (hexagon
socket screw with spring washer
and flat washer M3 × 6 Ni-3)
2 Platen stay F screw (hexagon
socket screw with spring washer
and flat washer M3 × 6 Ni-3)
5. Remove the platen.
4-35
6. Remove the platen heater and thermistor assembly from the back of the platen.
No. Part name

1 Platen heater

(3) Replacing Preheater

1. Remove the media guide R2.
"4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2" p.4-15
2. Remove the connectors for PRE_H relay assembly and PRE_H2 relay assembly.
NOTE
Replace the preheater while media guide R1 is attached to the printer.
3. Remove the media guide stay b-retaining screw (cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3 bk: 5), and remove the media
guide stay b.
No. Part name

1 Media guide stay b
2 Media guide stay b-retaining
screw (cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3
bk)
4-36
4. Remove the preheater and thermistor assembly.
No. Part name

1 Media guide R1
2 Preheater

NOTE
Decrease the heater attachment area before installing it.
4-37
4.5 Replacement of CR Driving Section Components

4.5.1 CR Motor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the CR motor assembly, remove the following covers.
• R side cover: "4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover" p.4-7
1. Detach the CR motor assembly connector from the cable connector.

2. Take the CR motor assembly cable off the clamp.
3. Release the CR locker by pushing it with your finger, then move the carriage from the capping position
to the left.
4. Loosen the CR tension mounting shaft on the R side frame, then release the CR belt tension.
No. Part name

1 CR belt
2 CR tension mounting shaft
1 2
5. Take the CR belt off the CR motor assembly pulley on the L side frame.
4-38
6. Remove the screws retaining the CR motor assembly to the CR motor mounting material (cup screw M4
× 8: 4).
No. Part name

1 CR motor mounting
material
2 CR motor screw
1 (cup screw M4 × 8)
2 3 CR motor
2
7. Replace the CR motor assembly.

4.5.2 Replacing CR_HP Sensor
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the CR_HP sensor assembly, remove the R side cover.
to the left.
4-39
2. Pull out the CR_HP cable assembly connector from the CR_HP sensor.
No. Part name

1 Hook
3
2 CR_HP sensor
3 Connector
1 2
3. Release the hook retaining the CR_HP sensor, then remove the CR_HP sensor.
4. Replace the CR_HP sensor.
4.5.3 Replacing Lever Sensor
NOTE
Before replacing the lever sensor, remove the following covers.
1. Move down the pressure lever forward (downward).
4-40
2. Detach the lever sensor cable assembly connector from the lever sensor.
No. Part name

5
1 Pressure lever
1
2 Lever sensor
3 Hook
4 4 Sensor mounting plate
5 Lever sensor cable

assembly connector
4
2 3
3. Release the hook retaining the lever sensor, then replace the lever sensor.
4.5.4 Replacing T Fence
NOTE
Before replacing the T fence, remove the following covers.
1. Remove the T fence spring from T fence spring hook on the L frame side.
1 No. Part name

1 T fence spring
2 T fence spring hook
4-41
2. From the three fence guides, remove the T fences by following instructions in the diagram below.
T fence
1 Ԙ
Ԛ
ԙ
Slide the T fence in the order side view

of arrows shown above to install.
2
Fence guide
No. Part name

1 T fence
2 Fence guide
CAUTION
When removing the T fence, note the following.

• Do not pull the T fence by force; the fence guide can be easily broken.
• Pay attention not to damage or break the T fence.
3. Remove the T fence from the CR rail frame R hook on the R frame side, then pull it out toward the
direction of the arrow in the diagram.
No. Part name

1 T fence
2 T fence hook
1
4. Replace the T fence.

5. Fold a new T fence to the outside (90 degrees) at the point 9 mm from the edge, then install it to the CR
rail frame hook.
4-42
NOTE
Attach the C-cut side of T fence to the origin side of the CR rail frame.
Attach C-cut side

to the origin side.
T fence
6. Insert the T fence into the CR encoder assembly.
No. Part name

1 T fence
2 2 CR encoder assembly
4-43
7. Install the T fence to the fence guide.
side view No. Part name

1 T fence
Ԛ
2 Fence guide
Ԙ
ԙ
Slide the T fence in the order

of arrows shown above to install.
8. Install the T fence spring to the T fence spring hook on the L frame side.
4.5.5 Replacing CR Driven Pulley
NOTE
Before replacing CR driven pulley assembly, remove the following covers.
• Top cover: "4.2.6 Removing Top Cover" p.4-13
to the left.
4-44
2. Loosen the CR tension mounting shaft on the R side frame, then release the CR belt tension.
5
back-side㧕 4
No. Part name
1 Driven pulley shaft
2 CR belt
3 CR driven pulley
4 Tension spring
1
5 CR tension mounting
shaft
3. Take the CR belt off the CR motor assembly pulley on the L frame side.
4. Remove the CR driven pulley.
5. Remove the CR driven pulley shaft from the CR driven pulley.
NOTE
• Installation direction of the driven pulley shaft is specified.Thin shaft side faces down.
Also refer to "10.5 Exploded View" p.10-10.
• After installing the CR driven pulley, move the carriage with your hand from side to side, and
check if the CR belt is equally balanced on the pulley center section of the CR motor assembly.
4-45
4.5.6 Replacing Pressure Arm Assembly

This section describes how to replace the pressure spring, pressure roller assembly, and pressure arm
assembly.
(1) Replacing Pressure Spring

1. Remove the spring attached to pressure bracket and pressure arm using spring hook, tweezers, or
longnose pliers.
No. Part name

1 Pressure bracket
2 Pressure arm
3 Pressure spring
2 3
2. Replace the pressure spring.

4-46
(2) Replacing Pressure Arm Assembly

1. Remove the media guide R2.
"4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2" p.4-15
2. Remove the media guide stay a screw (cup screw M3 × 6, Ni-3bk: 5), and tilt it to the far side.
No. Part name

1 Pressure arm assembly
2 Media guide stay a
(at slant angle)
1 3 Media guide a-retaining

screw (cup screw M3 × 6,
Ni-3bk)
2 3
3. Remove the pressure spring.

"(1) Replacing Pressure Spring" p.4-46
4. Remove the pressure arm assembly and replace it through the front space of tilted media guide stay a.
4-47
4.6 Replacement of Head Section Components

4.6.1 Replacing Print Head
NOTE
Before replacing the print head, remove the R side cover or the top cover.
"4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover" p.4-7
"4.2.6 Removing Top Cover" p.4-13
1. Perform ink discharge operation to discharge ink entirely from the ink paths.
NOTE
Cover the platen surface by placing media before performing ink discharging so that the ink does not
spill on the platen directly.
TIP
"5.7.9 HeadWash Menu" p.5-42
to the left.
3. Remove the CR board cover-retaining screw (M3 × 8, S tight cup: 1).
No. Part name
2 1 CR board cover screw

(M3 × 8, S tight cup)
2 CR board cover
4. Remove the CR board cover.
4-48
5. Remove the cable cover L-retaining screw ( pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M3 × 8 W
sems: 2) (tapping screw M3 × 8, S tight cup: 1).
No. Part name

1 Cable cover L screw
1 3 (M3 × 8 pan-head screw
with spring washer and flat
washer W sems)
2 2 Cable cover L
3 Cable cover L screw

(M3 × 8, S tight cup)
6. Remove the cable cover R-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 8, S tight cup: 2) (pan-head screw with
spring washer and flat washer M3 × 8 W sems: 1).
3
No. Part name
1 Cable cover R
2 Cable cover R screw
(M3 × 8 pan-head screw
with spring washer and
flat washer W sems: 1)
3 Cable cover R screw
2 (M3 × 8, S tight cup: 2)
7. Remove the cable cover.
4-49
8. While rotating the damper fixing material, remove the eight ink tubes from the damper fixing material
hook.
No. Part name
1 1 Ink tube
2 Damper fixing material
9. Remove the damper fixing material.

10. Remove the eight damper assemblies connected to the print head that needs to be replaced, with a flat-
head driver or other tools.
CAUTION
• Do not press the transparent film on the damper assembly with your hand. Doing so may
discharge the ink filled inside the damper assembly.
• Be careful not to damage the transparent film on the damper assembly.
NOTE
When removing the damper assembly, note the following.
• To easily remove the damper assembly, insert a flat-head driver between the carriage and the
damper assembly left protruding part, then pry out the damper assembly.
• To avoid residual ink leakage, place the removed damper on a rag.
4-50
No. Part name

1 Flat-head driver insertion point
2 Damper assembly
11. Remove the damper locating material-retaining screw (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat
washer M3 × 6 W sems: 2).
1
No. Part name
1 Damper locating material
2 Damper locating material screw
(pan-head screw with spring
washer and flat washer M3 × 6
W sems)
12. Remove the damper locating material.

13. Remove the print head from the carriage.
No. Part name

1 Print head
2 Head tape wire
1 2
4-51
14. Remove the two head tape wire from the print head.
CAUTION
• The QR code label on the print head should be written down or kept in a safe place for
later use.
• Do not touch the nozzles of the print head. Make sure that the nozzles do not get any dust.
• When connecting or removing the tape wire (FFC), always pull or push the wire
perpendicularly to the connector.Pulling or pushing the wire slantwise may damage/short/
break the terminals in the connectors, resulting in a breakdown of the print head.
• The folding orientation of the FFC (tape wire) differs between head side and the CR board
side.Make sure to attach the tape wire in the appropriate orientation.
15. Replace the print head.

4.6.2 Replacing Cutter Holder Assembly
(1) Replacing Cutter Holder Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the cutter holder assembly, remove the following parts referring to the
instructions shown below.
Removing the cable cover L, R: refer to "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-48
Removing the P_EDGE sensor, cutter sensor connector: refer to "4.10.1 Replacing CR Board
Assembly" p.4-75
4-52
1. Release the sensor cables in the front of the cutter holder assembly from the clamps (3 points) on the front
of the cutter holder assembly.
No. Part name

5
1 Clamp
1
2 Cutter holder assembly screw
4 washer and flat washer M3 × 8
W sems)
3 Cutter holder assembly
2
4 Height adjusting lever screw
5 Height adjusting lever
2. Remove the height adjusting lever spring from the height adjusting lever.
3. Remove the cutter holder-retaining screw (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M3 × 8 W
sems: 2).
4. Remove the cutter holder assembly from the carriage.
5. Replace the parts.
4-53
(2) Replacing Cutter Solenoid Assembly

1. Remove the cutter holder assembly.
2. Push the tab of the CR lock kicker with a sharp-pointed tool or a flat-head driver to remove the CR lock
kicker.

No. Part name
1 Cutter solenoid assembly iron-
core
2 Cutter solenoid spring
3 Cutter solenoid assembly
4 CR lock kicker
5 CR lock kicker tab
3. Remove the cutter solenoid assembly iron-core and the cutter solenoid spring.
4. While opening the cutter holder assembly upper tab, push out the cutter solenoid assembly from the cutter
holder assembly bottom with a flat-head driver or other tools, then remove it.
5. Remove the cutter solenoid terminal connector.
6. Replace the cutter solenoid assembly.
4-54
NOTE
When installing the cutter solenoid, note the following.
• Joint the cutter cap and the CR lock kicker, push down the cutter cap and the CR lock kicker
together to install them onto the cutter holder.

No. Part name
1 CR lock kicker
2 Cutter cap
• Make sure to join the cutter cap and the CR lock kicker.Otherwise, when turning the power ON,
the carriage cannot move from the origin point to the left.
(3) Replacing CR_ENC Assembly

2. Remove the CR_ENC assembly-retaining screw (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M
3 × 8 W sems: 1).
No. Part name

1 Mounting plate screw
2 CR_ENC assembly
3 CR_ENC assembly screw

3
washer and flat washer M 3 × 8
W sems)
2
4-55
3. Detach the cable from the three clamps.

4. Remove the CR_ENC assembly.
(4) Replacing P_EDGE Sensor Assembly

2. Remove the P_EDGE sensor assembly-retaining screw (M3 × 6, P tight cup: 1).
No. Part name

1 P_EDGE sensor assembly
screw
(M3 × 6, P tight cup)
2 P_EDGE sensor assembly
3. Detach the cable from the three clamps.

4. Remove the P_EDGE sensor assembly.
4-56
4.7 Replacement of Maintenance Section Components

4.7.1 Removing Maintenance Base Assembly
NOTE
• When replacing the parts inside the maintenance assembly, make sure to reset the following
counter parameters.
• “Waste Ink” or “Cleaning”: "6.3.1 Counter Display Menu" p.6-3
• Before replacing the parts in the pump cap assembly, remove the following parts.
• Ink holder cover: "4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover" p.4-11
• Scroller receiver: "4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R)" p.4-15
1. Enter “CR maintenance confirmation“ mode using operation panel, then turn the printer power off.
Confirm that the cleaner head is positioned in the front side.
"User’s Guide"
No. Part name

Pull near side
1 Pump cap assembly
2 Cleaner head
4-57
2. Pull up the pressure lever.
No. Part name

1 Pressure lever
3. Remove the lock bracket-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S cup tight: 1).
No. Part name

1 Head lock-retaining screw
(tapping screw M3 × 6, S cup
tight)
1
2 Head lock
4-58
4. Remove the flushing box retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S cup tight: 2), and remove the flushing
box.
No. Part name

1 Flushing box assembly
2 Flushing box retaining screw
cup)
5. Remove the cable on the maintenance base 1 from the clamps.
No. Part name

1 Motor relay connector
2 Clamp
2 1
6. Remove the motor relay connector.
4-59
7. Remove the wiper phase sensor connector.
No. Part name

1 Wiper phase sensor connector
2 Pump unit
8. Remove the maintenance base 1 front part-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 x 6, S tight cup: 2).
No. Part name

1 Maintenance base 1-retaining
screw (tapping screw M3 x 6, S
tight cup)
2 Maintenance base 2
1 2
4-60
9. Remove the maintenance base 1 front part-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 x 6, S tight cup: 2).
No. Part name

1 Maintenance base 1-retaining
screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S
tight cup)
2 1
10. Hold the maintenance base 1 up and rotate it to remove as shown below.
4.7.2 Replacing Pump Cap Assembly
NOTE
Before removing the pump cap assembly, remove the following parts.
• Flushing box: "4.7.4 Replacing Flushing Box Assembly" p.4-64
• Maintenance base assembly: "4.7.1 Removing Maintenance Base Assembly" p.4-57
• Ink holder cover: "4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover" p.4-11
4-61
1. Remove the screw retaining the pump cap assembly to the maintenance base 1 (pan-head screw with
spring washer and flat washer M3 × 6: 4).
No. Part name

1
1 Pump cap assembly screw

back-side㧕
3 Pump cap assembly

3
2. Replace the pump cap assembly

4-62
4.7.3 Replacing Cleaner Head (Cleaning Wiper)
NOTE
Before replacing the cleaner head, remove the following covers.
1. Remove the cleaner head from the cleaner head by using tweezers, and lift it from the holder upward.
2
No. Part name
1 Pump cap assembly
2 Cleaning wiper
NOTE
To remove the wiper, use the tweezers to unhook the lower hook of the wiper.
Hook
2. Replace the cleaner head.

4-63
NOTE
When removing the cleaner head, note the following.
• Do not touch the cleaner head with your bare hands.
• Make sure that the cleaner head get no dust or oil.
• Install the cleaner head so that the point of the cleaner head is located to the observer's right side.
2 No. Part name

1 Cleaner head
1
2 Head point
• Insert the cleaner head into the holder to the full depth securely and hook it.
4.7.4 Replacing Flushing Box Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing flushing box, release the head lock and move the carriage to the opposite side of the
origin.
1. Remove the screw retaining the head lock (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 1).
No. Part name

2 Flushing box assembly screw
cup)

4-64
2. Remove the screw retaining the flushing box assembly to the platen base (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight
cup: 2).
No. Part name

1
2 Flushing box assembly screw
cup)
3. Replace the flushing box assembly.

4-65
4.8 Replacement of Ink Supply Section Components

Four Ink Holder (I/H) assemblies are installed in this product. The replacement procedures for one of these
I/H assemblies are explained in this section.
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the I/H assembly, remove the following covers.
• I/H cover: "4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover" p.4-11
4.8.1 Replacing Ink Holder (I/H) Assembly

TIP
"5.7.9 HeadWash Menu" p.5-42
2. Remove the ink sensor assembly connector (4 pieces) from the main board assembly.
TIP
"4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket" p.4-18
3. Take the removed sensor assembly cable off the clamp (2 points).
No. Part name

1 Clamp
1
2 I/H assembly
4-66
4. Remove the joint screw (M6) connecting the I/H assembly and the SUS pipe, and remove the o-ring
inside.
No. Part name

1 Joint screw
2 I/H assembly
2
5. Remove the screw retaining the I/H assembly to the I/H base (tapping screw M3 × 10, S cup: 2).
6. Replace the I/H assembly.
NOTE
When tighten the joint screw, use the optional jig and pay attention to the fastening torque.
"10.4 Jigs and Tools" p.10-8
4-67
4.8.2 Replacing Ink Sensor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing the ink ID sensor assembly, remove the following parts.
• I/H assembly: "4.8.1 Replacing Ink Holder (I/H) Assembly" p.4-66
1. Detach the ink ID sensor assembly cable from the hooks (2 pieces) on the back of the I/H assembly.
2. Remove the screw retaining the holder pressure spring to the IC holder mounting plate (P tight cup M3 ×
6 Ni-3: 2).
No. Part name

1 1 Holder pressure spring
2 IC holder mounting plate
3
3 Holder pressure spring screw
(P tight cup M3 × 6 Ni-3)
3. Remove the screw retaining the ink END sensor to the holder mounting plate (tapping screw M3 × 10, S
cup: 1).
No. Part name

1 Ink END sensor screw
(tapping screw M3 × 10, S cup)
2 Ink END sensor
1 2
4-68
4. Release the tab of the frame assembly needle, push down and slide it sideways (see the directions of the
arrows), then remove the cartridge frame assembly.
No. Part name

1 Frame assembly needle
Ԙ 2 Frame assembly needle tab
5. Remove the screw retaining the ink NOT sensor to the I/H assembly (M2 × 8, S tight binding: 1).
No. Part name

1 Ink NOT sensor
2 Ink NOT sensor screw
(M2 × 8, S tight binding)
4-69
6. Replace the ink cable assembly.

NOTE
When reassembling the unit, note the following sensor fastening torque.
• Ink NOT sensor: Slight overtorque may damage the parts. Gradually torque the sensor to avoid
tightening it too much.
• Confirm that the switch is not stuck when it is pressed.
• Ink END sensor: Tighten the sensor to avoid rattling.
4.8.3 Replacing Cover Sensor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing the cover sensor assembly, remove the parts as follows.
"4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover" p.4-10
1. Remove the screw retaining the sensor cover (L/R) to the frame (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 1 per
cover). (The diagram below shows the sensor cover R).
No. Part name

1 Sensor cover R
1 2 Sensor cover R screw

2
cup)
2. Remove the cover sensor connector from the main board.

"4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket" p.4-18
4-70
3. Detach the cable from the cover (L/R) sensor cable-retaining clamp.(The diagram below shows the cover
R sensor).
2
No. Part name
1 Clamp
2 Cover R sensor cable
4. Replace the cover sensor assembly.

4.8.4 Replacing Heater Junction Board
NOTE
Before replacing the heater junction board, remove the parts as follows.
1. Remove the following connectors shown in the table below from the heater junction board.
Table 4-5 Connectors Connected to Heater Junction Board

No. pins
1 J2 4 White HEATER CONT board Connected to J8 by using power

cable between CNT - JC.
2 J3 - - HEATER CONT board Connected to J9 by using serial

cable between MAIN - CNT.
3 J5 10 White INK K Connected with INK cable

assembly (VJ12).
4 J6 10 White INK C Connected with INK cable

assembly (VJ12).
5 J7 10 White INK M Connected with INK cable

assembly (VJ12).
4-71
Table 4-5 Connectors Connected to Heater Junction Board (Continued)

No. pins
6 J8 10 White INK Y Connected with INK cable

assembly (VJ12).
7 J9 - - - Unused
8 J10 - - Unused
9 J11 - - - Unused
10 J12 - - - Unused
11 J13 - - - Unused
12 J14 - - - Unused
13 J15 - - - Unused
14 J16 - - - Unused
15 J17 - - - Unused
16 J18 - - - Unused
17 J19 - - - Unused
18 J20 - - - Unused
19 J21 - - - Unused
20 J22 - - - Unused
21 J23 - - - Unused
22 J24 - - - Unused
2. Replace the power cable between CNT - JC and serial cable between MAIN - CNT.
3. Remove the screw retaining the heater junction board (cup screw M3 × 6, white: 4).
1
No. Part name
1 Heater junction board
assembly
2 Heater junction assembly
2 2 screw
(cup screw M3 × 6, white)
4-72
4. Replace the heater junction board.

5. To remove the unit, reverse the removal procedure.
4.9 Replacement of Frame Section Components

4.9.1 Replacing Suction Fan Assembly
1. Remove the screw retaining the fan plate to the B frame (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 3), then
remove the suction fan assembly.
No. Part name

1 Fan plate screw (M3 × 6, S tight
cup)
2 2 Fan plate
2. Remove the suction fan assembly cable connector, then remove the suction fan assembly from the B
frame.
No. Part name

1 Suction fan cable connector
1 6 2 Suction fan screw (M4 × 8 pan-

head machine screw)
3 Suction fan
2 4 Suction fan screw (M4 × 40 pan-

head screw with spring washer
and flat washer polished)
3 4 5
5 Fan duct
6 Fan duct screw (M4 × 5 pan-
head machine screw)
3. Remove the screw retaining the fan duct (pan-head machine screw M4 × 5: 2), then remove the fan duct.
4-73
4. Remove the suction fan assembly retaining-screw (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer
M4 × 40 polished: 1) (pan-head machine screw M4 × 8: 1).
5. Replace the suction fan assembly
4.9.2 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the P_REAR sensor assembly, remove the following covers.
1. Remove the PF_REAR sensor assembly connector from the main board assembly.
2. Take the P_REAR sensor assembly cable off the clamp.
3. Remove the screw retaining the PE sensor plate to the frame (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 1).
No. Part name

1 1 P_REAR sensor assembly
2 PE sensor plate screw
2 (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight
cup)
3 PE sensor plate
4-74
4. Remove the screw retaining the P_REAR sensor assembly to the PE sensor plate (cup screw M2 × 6: 2).
No. Part name

1 P_REAR sensor assembly
screw (cup screw M2 × 6)
2 P_REAR sensor assembly
3 PE sensor plate
5. Replace the P_REAR sensor assembly.

4.10 Replacement of Cable Guide Section Components

4.10.1 Replacing CR Board Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing CR board assembly, remove the following covers.
• CR board cover: refer to the instructions up to step 4 in "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-48.
1. Remove the following connectors from the CR board assembly.
CAUTION
When connecting or removing the FFC type cables to the CR board assembly connector,
always pull or push the cables perpendicularly to the connector.
Pulling or pushing the wire slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the
connectors, resulting in a breakdown of the on-board elements.
Table 4-6 Connectors to CR Board Assembly

No. pins
1 J204 31 pins Black Print head Connected to J1.
4-75
Table 4-6 Connectors to CR Board Assembly(Continued)

No. pins
2 J205 31 pins Black Print head Connected to J2.
3 J201 31 pins Black Main board assembly Connected to J11.
6 J207 4 pins White CR_ENC assembly
7 J206 2 pins White Cutter solenoid assembly
8 J208 4 pins Black P_EDGE sensor assembly
9 J209 PG origin point sensor

3 pins White
assembly
2. Remove the CR board assembly-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 8, S tight cup: 4).
No. Part name

1 CR board screw
1 1 cup)
2 CR board
3 CR board mounting plate
3. Replace the CR board assembly.

4.10.2 Replacing Ink Tube
NOTE
Before replacing the ink tube, remove the following covers.
4-76
(1) Preparation of Replacing Ink Tube

2. Remove the tube clamps (3 points).
No. Part name

1 Tube guide
2 Tube clamp
3. Remove the tube film guide retainers (3 points).
No. Part name

1 Tube guide
2 Tube film guide retainer
1
2
4. Remove the CR board cover.

Up to step 4 in "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-48
5. Remove the CR tape wire from the CR board.
4-77
6. Remove the screw retaining the bearer mounting material and the bearer fixing material (tapping screw
M 3 × 8, S tight cup: 2) (M3 × 8, P tight cup: 1).
No. Part name

1 1 Bearer mounting material
2 screw (M3 × 8, P tight)
2 Bearer mounting material
3 Screw retaining the bearer
mounting material and the
bearer fixing material (M3 × 8,
S tight)
3
4 4 Bearer fixing material
7. Remove the bearer mounting material and the bearer fixing material.
(2) Replacing Ink Tube

1. Loosen the joint screw (M6) connecting the ink tube and the F branch.
No. Part name

1 1 Joint screw (M6)
2 F branch
4-78
2. Loosen the joint screw (M6) connecting the ink tube and the cartridge pipe.
No. Part name

1
1 Joint screw (M6)
2 Cartridge pipe
3. Remove the ink tube.

4. Remove the following parts from the ink tube.
• Joint screw (M6: 2 pieces)
• O-ring, large: (M6: 2 pieces)
5. Replace the ink tube.
4.10.3 Replacing CR Tape Wire
NOTE
Before replacing the CR tape wire, remove the following covers.
• CR board cover and the cable clamp: "4.10.2 Replacing Ink Tube" p.4-76
1. Remove the three CR tape wires from the main board assembly.
4-79
2. Take the CR tape wires off the clamps nearby the main board, then pull them out through the R frame
cable inlet.
No. Part name

1
1 CR tape wire
2 Clamp
3. Take the CR tape wire off the clamp (one point) nearby the R frame cable inlet (I/H assembly side).
1
No. Part name
1 CR tape wire
2 Clamp
4-80
4. Remove the bearer holder-retaining screw (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M3 × 6:
2), then remove the bearer holder.
No. Part name

1
1 Tube holder 2
2 Bearer holder and bearer
holder screw
washer and flat washer M3 × 6)
5. Remove the tube holder 1 and the tube holder 2.
No. Part name

1 Tube holder 1
2 Tube holder 2
1 2
4-81
6. Remove the following parts from the I/H backing plate.

• Tube guide film
• Steel bearer assembly
• CR cable (3 cables)
No. Part name

1 Tube guide film
2 Steel bearer
1
3 CR cable
2
7. Replace the CR cable.

NOTE
When connecting the CR cable, note the following.
• The CR cable has three layers. Make sure to match the corresponding connector numbers.
• Remove or insert the CR cable terminal perpendicularly to the CR board connector. Pulling or
pushing the wire slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the connectors.
4-82
VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual 5 Self-Diagnosis Mode
5 Self-Diagnosis Mode
5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 5- 4
5.2 Preparation .............................................................................................. 5- 4
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine ............................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 Starting Up ..................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode ...................................................... 5- 6
5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode ..................................................... 5-6
5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu ....................................... 5-8
5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu ...................................................................... 5- 10
5.5 Inspection Menu.................................................................................... 5- 11
5.5.1 Memory Size Menu ...................................................................... 5-12
5.5.2 Version Menu............................................................................... 5-13
5.5.3 Operation Panel Menu ................................................................. 5-14
5.5.4 Sensor Menu ............................................................................... 5-15
5.5.5 Encoder Menu ............................................................................. 5-17
5.5.6 Fan Menu..................................................................................... 5-17
5.5.7 History Menu................................................................................ 5-18
5.5.8 Head Waveform Menu ................................................................. 5-21
5.6 Ink Charging Menu................................................................................ 5- 22
5.7 Adjustment Menu.................................................................................. 5- 23
5.7.1 Head Nozzle Check Menu ........................................................... 5-24
5.7.2 Skew Check Menu ....................................................................... 5-27
5.7.3 Head Slant Check Menu .............................................................. 5-28
5.7.4 Voltage Adjustment...................................................................... 5-30
5-1
5 Self-Diagnosis Mode VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual
5.7.5 Uni-D / Bi-D Low Adjustment........................................................ 5-32
5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D High Adjustment ....................................................... 5-36
5.7.7 Side Margin Adjustment Menu ..................................................... 5-40
5.7.8 Test Printing Menu ....................................................................... 5-41
5.7.9 HeadWash Menu.......................................................................... 5-42
5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu............................................ 5-43
5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu ............................................................... 5-44
5.7.12 Solid Print Menu ........................................................................... 5-45
5.8 Cleaning Menu .......................................................................................5- 46
5.9 Sample Printing Menu...........................................................................5- 47
5.10 Time Setting ...........................................................................................5- 48
5.11 Parameter Menu.....................................................................................5- 48
5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu ....................................................... 5-49
5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu .............................................................. 5-51
5.12 Servo Setting .........................................................................................5- 56
5.13 Endurance Running Menu ....................................................................5- 58
5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu.......................................................... 5-59
5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu .......................................................... 5-60
5.13.3 Wiper Motor Endurance Menu...................................................... 5-61
5.13.4 Pump Endurance Menu................................................................ 5-62
5.13.5 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu ................................. 5-63
5.13.6 General Endurance Menu ............................................................ 5-64
5.13.7 Endurance Running Check Menu................................................. 5-65
5.14 Media Feed Menu...................................................................................5- 65
5-2
5.15 ExControl Menu .................................................................................... 5- 66
5.15.1 Version......................................................................................... 5-66
5.15.2 Sensor ......................................................................................... 5-67
5.15.3 Heater .......................................................................................... 5-68
5.15.4 History.......................................................................................... 5-69
5.16 PaperInitial Menu .................................................................................. 5- 69
5-3
5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the self-diagnosis function.
The self-diagnosis function adjusts the printing accuracy. It is used in the manufacturing process, adjustment,
and maintenance.
The self-diagnosis function is implemented in the system firmware. All functions are available from the
operation panel.
TIP
"2.3 Part Names and Functions" p.2-3
5.2 Preparation
Before you can use the self-diagnosis function, you must make the machine ready to call up the self-diagnosis
menu.
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine

Before starting up the self-diagnosis function, perform the following preparations.
(1) Setting Printing Media

Set a roll media for adjustment.
NOTE
• In the self-diagnosis menu display status, the media type is automatically set to roll media.
• During adjustment, use coated paper for the media.
(2) Connecting Power Cable

Connect the power cable to the machine’s inlet assembly and insert the power plug into an outlet.
NOTE
Do not connect three or more power plugs to one outlet.
5.2.2 Starting Up
To use the self-diagnosis function, you must first call up the self-diagnosis menu on the operation panel.
The self-diagnosis menu is completely independent of the normal operation mode and self-diagnosis display
mode. To call up the self-diagnosis menu, follow the steps below.
5-4
1. If the system is in the operation mode or the self-

diagnosis menu mode, press [Power] key to turn
the printer off.
2. While holding down [Backward feed] key,
[Forward feed] key and [Printing mode] key in
the operation panel simultaneously, press
[Power] key.
The system will enter the self-diagnosis mode
and display the self-diagnosis menu.
5-5
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode

This section explains how to operate in the self-diagnosis mode as well as providing the list of available
diagnosis items.
5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode

Follow the operation flow shown below to operate the self-diagnosis mode.
TIP
For more detailed operation steps, refer to the flow chart of the applicable diagnosis item.
1. Press [Next] key or [Back] key in the operation

panel to select the item to be diagnosed, and press
[Enter] key.
• The selected item is accepted.
• If the item has a sub menu, the sub menu is
displayed.
2. When the LCD monitor in the operation panel

indicates a setting value, the value can be
modified.
Press [Setting/value +] key or [Setting/value -]
key in the operation panel to modify the value.
3. To save the modified value, press [Enter] key in

the operation panel.
The modified set value is stored and the next item
is displayed
NOTE
If you press [Cancel] key, or, [Setting/value
+] key or [Setting/value -] key, instead of
[Enter] key, the modification is not stored.
5-6
4. To quit the diagnosis, press [Cancel] key in the

operation panel.
The system returns to an upper hierarchy of the
diagnosis menu.
5. To exit the self-diagnosis menu, press [Power]

key.
5-7
5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu

The self-diagnosis menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 5-1 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu

Diagnosis item Contents Reference
Platen Adjustment Performs temperature setting for the preheater and platen "5.4 Platen
Menu heater to 30 °C. Adjustment Menu"
p.5-10
Inspection Menu Performs various inspections on the circuit boards, sensors, "5.5 Inspection
and fans. Menu" p.5-11
Ink Charging Menu Performs ink charging. "5.6 Ink
Charging Menu"
p.5-22
Adjustment Menu Performs various adjustments for the printer mechanism. "5.7
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-23
Cleaning Menu Performs cleaning of the print head. "5.7.11 Feed
Pitch Check Menu"
p.5-44
Print Menu Performs sample printing necessary for adjustment. "5.9 Sample
Printing Menu" p.5-
47
Time Setting Menu Performs setting the time of the printer. "5.10 Time
Setting" p.5-48
Parameter Menu Configures various adjustment parameters. "5.11
Parameter Menu"
p.5-48
Servo Menu Performs adjustment for the servo motor. "5.12 Servo
Setting" p.5-56
Endurance Running Performs endurance running of the printer mechanism. "5.13
Menu Endurance Running
Menu" p.5-58
Media feed Menu Feeds media into the printer forward or backward. "5.14 Media
Feed Menu" p.5-65
ExControl Menu Diagnoses the controller board. "5.15 ExControl
Menu" p.5-66
PaperInitial Menu Performs initialization and media detection setting. "5.16
PaperInitial Menu"
p.5-69
5-8
Previous menu
[Enter] key
Adj.Platen Menu
[Cancel] key
Next menu Previous menu [Enter] key
Test Menu
[Cancel] key
InkCharge Menu
[Cancel] key
Next menu Previous menu
[Enter] key
Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Cleaning Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Print Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
SetTime Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Parameter Menu
[Cancel] key
ࠪࡦ࠲ࠐࡦ㧦࡛࠙ࠪࡈࠖ࡯࠻ࠐ Servo Menu

[Cancel] key
Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
PaperFeed Menu
[Cancel] key
ExControl Menu
[Cancel] key
PaperInitial Menu
[Cancel] key
Next menu
5-9
5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu

In the platen adjustment menu, you can set the temperature of the preheater and platen heater to 30 °C.
Parts assembly and adjustment should be done in the condition.
* This item displays platen temperature only.
Previous menu
[Enter] key PreHeater
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key PlatenHeater 1
[Cancel] key
[Cancel] key
Fig. 5-1 If the heater temp. do not reach 30°C.
Previous menu
[Enter] key PreHeater
[Cancel] key
[Cancel] key
[Cancel] key
Fig. 5-2 If the heater temp. reach 30°C.
5-10
5.5 Inspection Menu

In the inspection menu, you can perform various inspections on the circuit boards, sensors, and fans.
The inspection menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 5-2 Diagnosis Items for Inspection Menu

Diagnosis Contents Reference
item
Memory size Displays the size of memories installed on the main board assembly "5.5.1 Memory
Size Menu" p.5-12
Version Displays the versions of the firmware and main board assembly "5.5.2 Version
• Firmware version Menu" p.5-13
• Backup parameter version
• Setting of dip switches
• Revision of main board assembly
Operation Used to check the functions of the operation panel keys, LCD, and "5.5.3
panel LED. Operation Panel
Menu" p.5-14
Sensor Displays the status of the following sensors. "5.5.4 Sensor
• CR_ORG sensor Menu" p.5-15
• Wiper sensor
• Cover sensor
• Lever sensor
• Head slide sensor
• Waste fluid box sensor
• P_EDGE sensor
• P_REAR sensor
• Head transistor thermistor sensor
• Head thermistor sensor
Encoder Displays the detected values from the following encoders. "5.5.5 Encoder
• CR (Carriage) Menu" p.5-17
• PF (Media feed)
Fan Used to check if the following fans operate normally by turning them "5.5.6 Fan
ON and OFF. Menu" p.5-17
• Suction fan
• Cooling fan
History Used to check the following records. Used to initialize the serious "5.5.7 History
error history. Menu" p.5-18
• Maintenance history
• Serious error history
Head Used to check the head-driving waveform. "5.5.8 Head
waveform Waveform Menu"
p.5-21
5-11
Previous menu
[Enter] key Ram Capacity Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key Version Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key Panel Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key Sensor Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Encoder Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Fan Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
History Menu
[Cancel] key
Next menu Previous menu [Enter] key Head Signal Menu
[Cancel] key
5.5.1 Memory Size Menu

This menu displays the size of memories installed on the main board assembly.
[Cancel] key
Test Menu
NOTE
Memory Size Menu displays the total size of the memories (128MB or 256MB) installed on the main
board assembly.
5-12
5.5.2 Version Menu

This menu displays the following contents about the firmware and main board assembly.
• Firmware version
• Backup parameter version
• Setting of dip switches of main board assembly
• Revision of main board assembly
TIP
Settings for the DIP switch on the main board assembly are displayed as follows:
• ON: 0, OFF:1
• Switch No. 1: LSB
• Switch No. 2: MSB
Previous menu
Firmware version
Backup parameter version
Setting of dip switches
of main board assembly
Revision of main board assembl
Next menu
5-13
5.5.3 Operation Panel Menu

This menu is used to check the functions of the operation panel keys, LCD, and LEDs.
(1) Operation Panel Key Check

When you press a key in the operation panel, the name of the key is displayed on the LCD. To exit the
operation panel key check, press [Cancel] key twice.
(2) LCD Check

The entire LCD screen is filled in black. You can check for any missing dots.
(3) LED Check

The following LEDs light up in order. The LCD displays the name of the LED that is currently illuminated
• Power lamp
• Data lamp
• Roll lamp
• Sheet lamp
• Color lamp
• Black & white lamp
• High speed lamp
• Normal lamp
Previous menu Operation Panel Key Check

[Enter] key
[Cancel] key (twice)

Next menu Previous menu LCD Check
[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
Next menu Previous menu LED Check
[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
Next menu
5-14
5.5.4 Sensor Menu

This menu displays the sensor status on the operation panel.
If the displayed sensor status does not match the actual machine status, replace or adjust the relevant sensor
referring to the table below.
Table 5-3 Inspection Items in Sensor Menu

No. Sensor name Status in display Reference
1 CR_HP sensor ON / OFF "4.5.2 Replacing CR_HP
Sensor" p.4-39
2 Waste fluid box sensor ON / OFF -
3 Wiper sensor ON / OFF

4 Cover sensor Open / Close -
5 Lever sensor Up / Down "4.5.3 Replacing Lever Sensor"

p.4-40
6 P_EDGE sensor 0 to 255 "7.11.1 P_EDGE Sensor
Sensitivity Adjustment" p.7-32
7 P_REAR sensor 0 to 255 "7.11.2 P_REAR Sensor
Adjustment" p.7-35
8 Headgap Low / High -
9 Head ** ºC "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head"

p.4-48
10 Transistor1, 2 ** ºC -
5-15
NOTE
• For the following sensors, the sensor sensitivity is displayed in decimal number.
• Waste fluid box sensor
• P_EDGE sensor
• P_REAR sensor, Waste fluid box sensor
Previous menu
CR_HP Sensor
WasteTank Sensor
Wiper Sensor
Cover Sensor
Lever Sensor
P_EDGE Sensor
P_REAR Sensor
Headgap Sensor
Head Sensor

H Transistor 1
H Transistor 2
Next menu
5-16
5.5.5 Encoder Menu

This menu displays the detected values from the following encoders.
• CR_ENC (Carriage)
• PF_ENC (Media feed)
NOTE
For the encoder-detected values, the encoder pulse numbers are displayed in hexadecimal number.
Previous menu
CR_ENC
PF_ENC
Next menu
5.5.6 Fan Menu

This menu is used to check if the fans operate normally by turning them ON and OFF.
If this operation is selected, the fans operate as follows:
• Suction fan: Turns to ON.

• Cooling fan: Turns to OFF.
If you press [Cancel] key, the suction fan is deactivated and the cooling fan is resumed, and the display shifts
to "Inspection: Fan".
Previous menu
Next menu
5-17
5.5.7 History Menu

This menu is used to check maintenance history and serious error history.
This menu is used to check maintenance history and serious error history and to initialize serious error history.
Previous menu
Maintenance history
Serious error history
Next menu
Initialization of the serious
Next menu communication
(1) Maintenance History

This displays the past maintenance records on the following components.
• Waste fluid box capacity

• Number of CR motor activation cycles
• Number of PF motor activation cycles
• Number of printed copies
• Number of cleaning cycles
• Pump count (number of pump wheel cycles)
• Discharged amount of heads (K. C. M. Y)
• Number of media cuts
• Number of cutter solenoid downs
• Number of lock solenoid downs
NOTE
All values of maintenance history are indicated in hexadecimal form.
5-18
Previous menu
Waste fluid tank capacity
(Unit: micro litter)
Frequenc[ of the wiper blade used
CR Motor driving (Unit : Operation count)
(Ink tube reciprocating count and the function)
PF Motor driving (Unit : 220 pulse)

Frequenc[ of printing
Frequenc[ of cleaning

Head B1 Fire (Unit: Mdot)
Head B2 Fire (Unit: Mdot)

Head C1 Fire (Unit: Mdot)
Head C2 Fire (Unit: Mdot)

Head M1 Fire (Unit: Mdot)
Head M2 Fire (Unit: Mdot)
Head Y1 Fire (Unit: Mdot)

Head Y2 Fire (Unit: Mdot)㧕

Frequenc[of the pump operation
(Pump wheel rotation count)
Frequency of the lock solenoid moving down
Next menu
5-19
(2) Serious Error History

Indicates serious error history.
NOTE
• The serious error history does not include CPU error.
• The serious error history menu indicates the history up to 32.
Previous menu
Next menu
(3) Error Initialization

This menu is used to initialize the serious error history.
[Enter] key
5-20
5.5.8 Head Waveform Menu

This menu is used to check the head-driving waveform.
NOTE
Magnification can be selected from the range of x1 - 100000. Nozzle can be selected among A - H
and ALL.
Previous menu
[Enter] key
Next menu
5-21
5.6 Ink Charging Menu

In the ink charging menu, you can charge ink.
The ink charging menu includes the following items.
Table 5-4 Ink Charging menu
Charging item Contents

InkCharge Performs initial ink charging.
LittleCharge Performs a small amount of ink charging.
Previous menu
[Enter] key
Next menu
* In “LittleCharge“ process, the printer charges a small amount of ink, which is one-fourth of
“InkCharge“ main suction steps.
5-22
5.7 Adjustment Menu

In this menu, you can align the printing position and correct the media feed operation.
The adjustment menu includes the following diagnosis menus.
Table 5-5 Diagnosis Items in Adjustment Menu

Head nozzle check Prints out a printing to check the ink discharge "5.7.1 Head Nozzle
performance of the head nozzles. Check Menu" p.5-24
Skew check Performs media feed and detects the degree of skew in "5.7.2 Skew Check
media feed by the sensor. Menu" p.5-27
Head slant check Prints out a printing to check for print head slant "5.7.3 Head Slant
(horizontal and vertical direction). Mechanical Check Menu" p.5-28
adjustment must be performed as necessary.
Volt. Offset Adjusts the print position of VSD3 - small head. "5.7.4 Voltage
Adjustment" p.5-30
Uni-D / Bi-D Prints out a printing to align the nozzle line distance "5.7.5 Uni-D / Bi-D
adjustment Low (Uni-D) of PG Low and the position of the repeated Low Adjustment" p.5-
printing. 32
Uni-D 240: 240 cps
Uni-D 320: 320 cps
Bi-D 240: 240 cps
Bi-D 320: 320 cps
Uni-D / Bi-D Prints out a printing to align the nozzle line distance "5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D
adjustment High (Uni-D) of PG High and the position of the repeated High Adjustment" p.5-
printing. 36
Uni-D 240: 240 cps
Uni-D 320: 320 cps
Bi-D 240: 240 cps
Bi-D 320: 320 cps
Side margin Sets the side margin. "5.7.7 Side Margin
adjustment Adjustment Menu" p.5-
40
Test printing Prints out a nozzle check pattern and adjustment "5.7.8 Test Printing
variables. Menu" p.5-41
HeadWash Cleans the tubes and heads using cleaning liquid. "5.7.9 HeadWash
Menu" p.5-42
Software counter Clears various software counters. "5.7.10 Software
initialization Counter Initialization
Menu" p.5-43
Feed amount check Used to check the media feed amount per band. "5.7.11 Feed Pitch
Check Menu" p.5-44
Solid print check Performs solid nozzle print check (color selection, nozzle "5.7.12 Solid Print
selection and print direction selection are available). Menu" p.5-45
5-23

[Enter] key
Nozzle Check Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Check Skew Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Head Slant Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Volt.Offset Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Uni-D/Bi-D Adjustment Menu Low
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Uni-D/Bi-D Adjustment Menu High
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
SideMargin Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
TestPrint Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
HeadWash Menu
[Cancel] key
CountClear Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
SendPitch Menu
[Cancel] key
Fill Pattern Menu
[Cancel] key
Next menu
5.7.1 Head Nozzle Check Menu

In this menu, you can check if the head nozzles that has been charged can discharge ink correctly by printing
a sample printing. To check the head nozzle, follow the steps below.
1. Set media as necessary.

2. After media is set, the machine prints out head nozzle check patterns in the following modes.
• 1 pass, unidirectional
• PF: 360 dpi
• CR: 360 dpi
5-24
3. Check the printed head nozzle check patterns for the following points.
• Ink nozzle discharge amount (omission, discontinuity, meandering)
• Satellite
• T fence
• Nozzle alignment in vertical direction
• Nozzle alignment in horizontal direction
Nozzle check: Prints the patterns in the order of A to H.
Vertical nozzle alignment check: Prints the patterns in the order of A to H.
Horizontal nozzle alignment check (CW direction): Prints the patterns in the order of A to H.
Horizontal nozzle alignment check (CCW direction): Prints the patterns in the order of A to H.
4. If any abnormal conditions are found in the ink discharge status of the head nozzles, perform cleaning.
TIP
"5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu" p.5-44
5-25
5. After cleaning, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.
Media set
If media is not set

Finish
printing
Display during adjustment printing
Previous menu
Next menu
5-26
5.7.2 Skew Check Menu

Feed the paper to check the skew size using sensor.
When you select this item from the Adjustment Menu, the printer feeds the loaded media by one pass and
checks difference of the media edge positions before and after the media feed detected by the sensor.
NOTE
Before performing skew check, ensure that the media is set correctly.
The printer determines the media setting reference position during first detection of media left edge.
Therefore, the media that is not set correctly may cause errors as below.
• Media error occurs during skew check and printer operation stops.
• During media initial operation after power is turned on or media is cut, "Undefined Paper"
frequently occurs.
0.1 m increments
[Enter] key
If media is not set
Media set
Finish media initialization
Media edge detection finishes normaly
Table 5-6 Skew Amount Specification

Condition Specification
Roll media 7m 2.5 mm or less
50 m 10 mm or less
5-27
5.7.3 Head Slant Check Menu
(1) Horizontal Direction Checking

This menu prints out a sample printing to check for head slant in the horizontal direction.
To perform head slant check, follow the steps below.

2. After media is set, the printer prints out head slant check patterns in the following modes.
• 1 pass Uni-D
• PF: 360 dpi, CR: 360 dpi
3. Check the printed head slant check patterns. Checking items are as follows:
• Head slant
A: Check the point to check the slant.

B: Media feed direction
C: OK
D: Move the head adjusting cam upward.
E: Move the head adjusting cam downward.
OO $
#
OO
OO
% & '
4. If any head slant is found, perform mechanical adjustment.
TIP
"7.7 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)" p.7-25
5-28
5. After mechanical adjustment, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.
Finish printing
Previous menu
Finish printing

Output pattern
Next menu
(2) Vertical Direction Checking

This menu prints out a sample printing to check for head slant in the vertical direction.
To perform head slant check, follow the steps below.

2. After media is set, the machine prints out head slant check patterns in the following modes.
• 1 pass Uni-D
• PF: 360 dpi, CR: 360 dpi
3. Check the printed head slant check patterns. Checking items are as follows:
A: Check the point to check the vertical slant angle.
C: OK
D: Move the vertical-slant adjusting tab to the right.
E: Move the vertical-slant adjusting tab to the left.
$ # $ # $ # $ #
%%9
$ # $ # $ # $ #
$ %9
% & '
5-29
4. If any head slant is found, perform mechanical adjustment.
TIP
"7.8 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant)" p.7-27
5. After mechanical adjustment, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.
Finish printing
Previous menu
Finish printing

Output pattern
Next menu
5.7.4 Voltage Adjustment

This menu is used to adjust the voltage of VSD 3 small dot so that the print position will be corrected.
Check the small dot is on the center of the middle dots in the CR direction.
When adjusting, change the voltage up to 5V (0.1V increment) considering the current voltage as a basis.
Items Contents
240 CW Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps / CW printing.
240 CCW Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps / CCW printing.
The following figure shows a case for 240 CW.
Previous menu
Next menu
Next menu
5-30
[Enter] key
If media is not set
Media set
If head gap is PG-Low
Change head gap (to PG-Low)

If the temperature of the preheater and
platen heater is below 42 C
Finish warm-up * Pressing [Cancel] key stops control and start printing
Finish printing
Press [Setting/Value+] or [Setting/Value-] key
to change unit to pulse
Volt range: -5V to 5V (0.1V)
VH3S-1 to VH3S-4
Print pattern: 240 CW
2B 2A 1B 1A 2B 2A 1B 1A
CW
240CPS A
A: Print direction
B: Adjust the voltage so that the small dot printed positions (shown as dot-line) are the same with the
middle dot printed positions (in the CR direction).
C: Executed adjustment item is printed like this.
5-31
Items Speed
240 CW CW 240 CPS
320 CW CW 320 CPS
240 CCW CCW 240 CPS
320 CCW CCW 320 CPS
* Print pattern: Uni-D, 2-pass, 1A to 2B print

1st pass: prints middle dot
2nd pass: prints small dot
5.7.5 Uni-D / Bi-D Low Adjustment

Adjusts the gap of the print heads (in the CR moving direction) when the head is in the PG Low and the print
position of the head in repeatability printing.
To adjust, perform printing in repeatability printing and correct CW and CCW printing positions by inputting
parameters.
Adjustment items are shown below.
Table 5-7 Uni-D / Bi-D menu items
Item Contents
Uni-D 240 Adjusts CW at 240 CPS. PG Low or High
Bi-D 240 Adjusts Bi-D at 240 CPS. PG Low or High
Table 5-8 Uni-D / Bi-D adjustment items
Item Contents
Set up Sets the selected parameter.
Print Prints pattern according to the selected item with the
(Print1 if “Bi-D” is current parameter.
selected)
Print2 Prints pattern according to the selected item with the
(Displayed only when current parameter, plus with the values of ±2 / ±4 / ±6 / ±8
“Bi-D“ is selected.) to the current parameter.
Check the gap of those printed patterns.
The actual procedure is as follows.

2. After that, printer starts printing automatically.
5-32
3. Check the printed pattern of CW adjustment.

(The following shows a case for Uni-D 240 Low Print)
Prints the pattern in the order of 1A to 4B.
Lo-CW
240CPS A
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
4B 4A 3B 3A 2B 2A 1B 1A
B C
A: Media feed direction
B: Adjust the setting value so that these point matches.
Uni-D 240: Lo/Hi-CW 240 CPS
* Either “Lo“ or “Hi“ is displayed at where explained as “Lo/Hi“ above.
(The following shows a case for Uni-D 240 Low Print1)

Prints the pattern by using 2A nozzle.
* Both Uni-D / Bi-D High should be adjusted in the same procedure.
Lo-CCW
240CPS A
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A
B C
Bi-D 240: Lo/Hi-CW 240 CPS
5-33

If any abnormal conditions are found, identify the gap of the print positions and enter it as the CW
adjustment parameter.
After that, print test pattern again as necessary.
(The following shows a case for Uni-D 240)

[Enter] key
Next menu
Next menu
• The following shows a case for “Print1” or “Print2” is selected.

* The sample image is in common with Bi-D and Uni-D.
If media is not set

Media set
If head gap is PG-High
Change head gap (to Low)
If the temperature of the preheater and platen
heater is below 42 C
* Pressing [Cancel] key stops control and start printing
Finish printing
Back to Uni-D/Bi-D Top menu
5-34
• The following shows a case for “Set up” is selected.

to change the setting value.
Next menu Previous menu 1 pulse = 1/720 inch
Pulse range: -100 VQ 100
Next menu
If Bi-D is selected, the parameter input process is as shown below.

(The following shows a case for “Bi-D 240 - Setup” is selected.)

to change unit to pulse‫ޓ‬
1 pulse = 1/2880 inch
Next menu Previous menu Pulse range: -400 VQ400
Back to Uni㨺D/Bi-D Top menu
Next menu
5-35
5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D High Adjustment

Adjusts the gap of the print heads (in the CR moving direction) when the head is in the PG High and the print
position of the head in repeatability printing.
To adjust, perform printing in repeatability printing and correct CW and CCW printing positions by inputting
parameters.
Adjustment items are shown below.
Table 5-9 Uni-D / Bi-D menu items
Item Contents
Table 5-10 Uni-D / Bi-D adjustment items
Item Contents
Set up Sets the selected parameter.
Print Prints pattern according to the selected item with the
(Print1 if “Bi-D” is current parameter.
selected)
Print2 Prints 5 patterns according to the selected item with the
(Displayed only when current parameter, plus with the values of ±1 / ±2 to the
“Bi-D“ is selected.) current parameter.

2. After that, printer starts printing automatically.
5-36
3. Check the printed pattern of CW adjustment.

(The following shows a case for Uni-D 240 Print)
Prints the pattern in the order of 1A to 4B.
Lo-CW
240CPS A
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
4B 4A 3B 3A 2B 2A 1B 1A
B C
(The following shows a case for Bi-D 240)

Prints the pattern by using 2A nozzle.
* Both Uni-D / Bi-D High should be adjusted in the same procedure.
Lo-CCW
240CPS A
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A
B C
5-37

If any abnormal conditions are found, identify the gap of the print positions and enter it as the CW
adjustment parameter.
After that, print test pattern again as necessary.
(The following shows a case for CW adjustment Low1)

[Enter] key
Next menu
Next menu࡯ Previous menu
Next menu
• The following shows a case for “Print1” or “Print2” is selected.

* The sample image is in common with Bi-D and Uni-D.
If media is not set

Media set
If head gap is PG-High
Change head gap (to Low)
If the temperature of the preheater and platen
heater is below 42 C
* Pressing [Cancel] key stops control and start printing
Finish printing
Back to Uni-D/Bi-D Top menu
5-38
• The following shows a case for “Set up” (Uni-D 240) is selected.

Next menu Previous menu 1 pulse = 1/720 inch
Pulse range: -100 VQ100
Next menu
If Bi-D is selected, the parameter input process is as shown below.

(The following shows a case for “Bi-D 240 - Setup” is selected.)

1 pulse = 1/2800 inch
Next menu Previous menu Pulse range: -400 VQ400
$CEMVQ7PK&$K&VQROGPW
Next menu
5-39
5.7.7 Side Margin Adjustment Menu

This menu is used to adjust the printing margins.
To adjust the margins, follow the steps below.

2. After media is set, the printer prints out band feed correction adjustment patterns and cuts the media in
the following modes.
• Black, 1 pass, unidirectional, 360 dpi
3. Check the printed side margin adjustment patterns for the measurement.
TOP
1: Side margin
2: Media feed direction
4. Enter each measured value as the parameter.
(Input range: 0.0 to 6.0 mm (0.1 mm increments))
Press [Setting/value+] or [Setting/value-] key

to select initialize or check
After pressing [Enter]key
After printing
Side Margin: 0.1㨙㨙 increments
5-40
5.7.8 Test Printing Menu

In this menu, you can print out adjustment patterns for checking various adjustment items.

2. After media is set, the machine prints out the following test printings.
• Nozzle check: Prints head nozzle check patterns.
• Nozzle check steps: Prints head nozzle check patterns of lines only.
• Adjustment parameters: Prints setting values for each adjustment item.
• Error history: Evaluates the serious error history.
3. Press the [Enter] key in the operation panel to start the selected test printing.
Previous menu Printing Adjustment Pattern

[Enter] key
Previous menu [Enter] key
Next menu
5-41
5.7.9 HeadWash Menu

This menu is used to purge ink and clean the heads at the end of the manufacturing process and before print
head replacement.
TIP
In this process, it is possible to use cleaning liquid instead of shipping liquid.
1. Press [Enter] key in the operation panel to determine the Head Cleaning Menu.
2. Remove all ink cartridges.
3. Press [Enter] key in the operation panel to discharge ink.
4. After ink is discharged, install the head cleaning jig.
5. Press [Enter] key in the operation panel to charge shipping liquid.
6. After shipping liquid is charged, remove the head cleaning jig.
Remove all cartridges and press [Enter] key to discharge ink
Finish Ink Discharge
Set cleaning jig and press [Enter] key to charge shipping liquid
After shipping liquid is charged
Remove cleaning jig and press [Enter] key to discharge

shipping liquid
5-42
5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu

This menu is used to initialize the software counters such as the waste ink counter.
NOTE
The counters are initialized before delivery. Do not initialize them during maintenance.
The software counters that can be initialized through this menu are as follows.
Table 5-11 Software Counters to be Initialized

Counter Initial
value
Waste ink amount counter 0
Ink consumption counter K 0
Ink consumption counter C 0
Ink consumption counter M 0
Ink consumption counter Y 0
Cumulative print timer 0
Ink ID mask 0
Not-filled flag 1
Pressing the [Enter] key in the operation panel performs the software counter initialization.
Pressing [Cancel] key cancels the initialization.
Adjustment Menu
[Enter] key
Finish initialization
5-43
5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu

In this menu, you can check the media feed amount for one band by reviewing a sample printing.There is no
adjustment items.
To check the feed pitch, follow the steps below.

2. Select "Adj: Send Pitch".
3. Select the feed pitch.
• Pattern 1: Prints at intervals of 360 (720) dpi. This resolution causes no gaps.
• Pattern 2: Prints at intervals of 1440 dpi. This causes a gap in one line out of four lines.
4. Pattern 1 is printed as shown below.
1 inch
Next menu Previous menu Finish Printing or [Cancel] key
Next menu
5-44
5.7.12 Solid Print Menu

This menu is used to print solid print patterns with head on both ends.
• Print pattern
5mm B
Specified color nozzles of both series A and B

Nozzles for series B only A
Nozzles for series A only
5mm 20mm

B: 100% printing
Print the pattern in the order of 1A&1B, 1B&1B, 1A&1A.
Previous menu
Press [Setting/value +] or [Setting/value -] key
to select color to check
Next menu
[Enter] key
Previous menu
to select nozzle to eject ink
ALL: All nozzles
ODD: Odd numbered nozzles
Next menu Previous menu EVEN: Even numbered nozzles
Next menu
[Enter] key
Previous menu
to select color to check
CW: Eject ink when CW scanning
CCW: Eject ink when CCW scanning
Next menu
5-45
5.8 Cleaning Menu

In this menu, you can clean ink from the print heads.
The cleaning menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 5-12 Diagnosis Items in Cleaning Menu

Diagnosis item Contents
Economy Performs economy cleaning.
Normal Performs normal cleaning.
Powerful Performs powerful cleaning.

Economy Cleaning
[Cancel] key
Normal Cleaning
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Strong Cleaning
[Cancel] key
Next menu
5-46
5.9 Sample Printing Menu

This menu prints out a sample printing.
The sample printing menu includes the following items.
Table 5-13 Diagnosis Items in Sample Printing Menu

Adjustment pattern ALL Prints adjustment pattern.
Parameter ALL Prints out the set values of various adjustment items.
Error history Prints serious error history.
Dot diameter check Prints dot diameter check pattern.
NOTE
If you have not registered the serial number of the machine, you must enter the number before you
can start the adjustment variable printing.
Previous menu Adjust Pattern printing

[Enter] key
Next menu Previous menu Adjust Parameter printing

[Enter] key
Next menu Error record printing

[Enter] key
Next menu Dot diameter printing

[Enter] key
Next menu
5-47
5.10 Time Setting

Sets the calender controlled by RTC (Real Time Clock) on the main board.
Previous menu
Change the Year setting value input (1digit input)
by pressing [setting/value+] or [setting/value-]
Change the Month setting value input (1digit input)
Change the Date setting value input (1digit input)
Change the Hour setting value input (1digit input)
Change the Minute setting value input (1digit input)
5.11 Parameter Menu

In this menu, you can modify the set values of various adjustment items (adjustment parameters).
The parameter menu includes the following items.
Table 5-14 Diagnosis Items in Parameter Menu

Update Updates the adjustment parameters. "5.11.2 Parameter
Update Menu" p.5-51
Initialization Initializes the adjustment parameters. "5.11.1 Parameter
Initialization Menu"
p.5-49

Parameter Initialization Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Parameter Update Menu
[Cancel] key
Next menu
5-48
5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu

This menu initializes the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be initialized through this menu are
as follows.
• Uni-D / Bi-D parameter, wiper, CR motor, PF motor, pump, waste ink)

• Initialization of all items
Previous menu [Enter]

key
Next menu
(1) Voltage Offset

This menu updates the voltage offset parameter (VSD3 small dot).
Table 5-15 Voltage offset item
Items Contents
5-49
Previous menu
Next menu
(2) Uni-D / Bi-D Low

This menu updates the Uni-D / Bi-D adjustment parameter.
Previous menu
Next menu
(3) Uni-D / Bi-D High

Previous menu
Next menu
5-50
5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu

This menu updates the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be updated through this menu are as
follows.
NOTE
The updated parameters will not be stored in the flash memory unless the system power is turned
OFF.
• Head rank
• Voltage offset
• Uni-D / Bi-D Low
• Uni-D / Bi-D High
• Side margin
• Not-filled flag
• Serial number
• Smart chip name update

Head parameter update menu
[Cancel] key
Volt.Offset menu
[Cancel] key
[Cancel] key
Uni-D/Bi-D Low update menu
[Cancel] key
Uni-D/Bi-D High update menu
[Cancel] key Side Margin Update menu

[Cancel] key Ink Parameter Update menu

Serial No.Update menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Chip name ‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
[Cancel] key
5-51
(1) Head Rank

This menu updates the head rank parameters. The head rank is used to determine the print head driving
voltage and correct the head temperature.
After head rank is entered, the system shifts to the Ink Charge Menu.
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
[Enter] keyቯ Error will occur if input value is wrong.

Press [Enter] key to retry
[Cancel]
[Enter] key Initial Ink charge will not executed.
key
Head ID will be updated.
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
(2) Voltage Offset

This menu updates the voltage offset parameter (VSD3 small dot).
Table 5-16 Voltage offset item
Items Contents
240 CW Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps. CW printing.
240 CCW Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps. CCW printing.
320 CW Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 320 cps. CW printing.
320 CCW Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 320 cps. CCW printing.
Previous menu
Next menu
When it is 240 CW
5-52
(3) Uni-D / Bi-D Low

Previous menu
Next menu
(The following shows a case for “Uni-D 240” is selected.)
If any parameter has been changed

Previous menu
(4) Printing Position Alignment

This menu updates the printing position alignment parameters.

[Enter]
key
[Enter] key
Change the value by [setting/balue+]
or [setting/value-]key
-400 to 400
*It will be #2 when PG High
5-53
(5) Uni-D / Bi-D High

Previous menu
Next menu
(The following shows a case for “Uni-D 240” is selected.)
Previous menu
Next menu
(6) Side Margin

This updates the side margin parameters.
When any parameter has been changed
[Enter]
key
[Enter] key
5-54
(7) Ink Parameter

This updates the ink parameter. The available options are as follows.
• Set: Ink not charged

• Reset: Ink charged
NOTE
When selecting "Reset", be sure to install the cartridge.
[Enter] key
When any parameter
has been changed
[Enter] key
(8) Serial Number Entry

This is for entering the serial number.
Enter Serial Number (digit by digit)

5-55
(9) ChipName Update

This menu is for updating company name on the smart chip.
㧯㨔㨕㨜㧺㨍㨙㨑㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧝 Press [Setting/value+] / [Setting/value-]

to change the value.
1: Mutoh
2: AgfaGS
3: Iris
4: AgfaPP
5.12 Servo Setting

* Do not change the parameters. This menu is basically for check.
Table 5-17 Servo setting item
Items Contents
240 cps CW Servo setting at CR CW direction, 240 cps
240 cps CCW Servo setting at CR CCW direction, 240 cps
320 cps CW Servo setting at CR CW direction, 320 cps
320 cps CCW Servo setting at CR CCW direction, 320 cps
Table 5-18 Servo adjustment item
Items Contents
Proportional gain Sets proportional gain/
Integral gain Sets integral gain
Low-pass filter Sets low-pass filter
PWM scale Sets PWM scale
ωC Sets ω C
5-56
Previous menu
Next menu
[Enter] key 㧔When selecting 240cps CW 㧕
Previous menu
Next menu
Next menu
Next menu
='PVGT?MG[
Previous menu
Change the value(unit to count) by pressing
[setting/value+] or [setting/value-]key
* The maximum / minimum / count value for each item is shown blow.
Items Max. Min. Count

GP 0 × 2000 0 × 7800 0 × 200
GI 2 0 × 800 1
GLPF 255 1
PWM 10 15 1
ωC 30 60 5
5-57
5.13 Endurance Running Menu

Performs endurance running of mechanicals and the head.
The endurance running menu includes the following items.
Table 5-19 Diagnosis Items in Endurance Running Menu

CR motor Performs carriage stroke. "5.13.1 CR Motor
Endurance Menu" p.5-
59
PF motor Drives the PF motor. "5.13.2 PF Motor
60
Wiper motor Performs wiper operation. "5.13.3 Wiper
Motor Endurance
Menu" p.5-61
Pump Drives the pump motor assembly. "5.13.4 Pump
62
Nozzle print Performs sequential print operation of the print head. "5.13.5 Print Head
Endurance (Nozzle
Print) Menu" p.5-63
General endurance Performs endurance running on the CR and PF "5.13.6 General
concurrently. Endurance Menu" p.5-
64
Confirmation Confirms the number of endurance running cycles. "5.13.7 Endurance
Running Check Menu"
p.5-65

CR Motor Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
PF Motor Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
Pump Motor Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
Sequential Printing Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
General Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
Endurance Running Check Menu
[Cancel] key
5-58
5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the CR motor.
You can operate the carriage stroke according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown
below.
Table 5-20 Set Items in CR Motor Endurance Menu

Set item Contents Set value Remark
Running speed (CW, Set the carriage running speed 100, 120, 160, 200, Unit: cps
CCW) (CW direction, CCW direction) 240, 320, 400
Number of endurance Set the number of endurance -1 to 10000
running cycles running cycles
CAUTION
When the CR motor endurance running is performed, note the following;

• Install available ink cartridges.
If the CR motor endurance running is performed without ink cartridges, ink inside the tube
may leak through the ink holder during the carriage movement.
TIP
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the carriage continuously repeats endurance
running until cancel input is given from the operation panel.
• The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit number). If the
number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
• The carriage moving distance is fixed to the maximum value of print area.
Endurance count
[Enter] key
Check waiting time
[Enter] key
Performing endurance
[Enter] or [Cancel] key
5-59
5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the PF motor.
You can drive the PF motor according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown below.
Table 5-21 Set Items in PF Motor Endurance Menu

Media feed amount Set the media feed amount 0.1 to 100 Unit: mm
per endurance running
cycle
Number of endurance Set the number of -1 to 10000
running cycles endurance running cycles
TIP
• The following table shows the motor moving parameters to media feed amount.
Speed 35CPS
Acceleration 0.1G
Deceleration 0.1G
Media feed amount

[Enter] key
Endurance Count
[Enter] key
5-60
5.13.3 Wiper Motor Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the wiper motor.
You can set the wiping action according to the desired settings.
Table 5-22 Set Items in Cutter Endurance Menu

Waiting interval Set the waiting interval per 10 Unit: sec.
endurance running cycle
completion.
TIP
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the wiper continuously repeats endurance
• The waiting time is not modifiable.
Page size
[Enter] key
Endurance count
[Enter] key
Check waiting time
[Enter] key
5-61
5.13.4 Pump Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the pump motor assembly.
You can drive the pump motor assembly according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown
below.
Table 5-23 Set Items in Pump Motor Assembly Endurance Menu

Running speed Set the running speed of Super High / High /
pump motor assembly. Normal
TIP
• The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit number). If
the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
Previous menu
[Enter]
Next menu Previous menu key
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
Next menu key
Endurance Count
Performing Endurance [Enter] key
[Enter] or [Cancel ] key
5-62
The pump endurance running sequence is as follows.
1. Pump endurance running starts.

2. Pump phase detection is performed.
3. Rotates with the specified suction speed. This rotation is counted as one cycle.
Step 2 above is repeated the number of times specified as follows.
Super High 4000
High 3000
Normal 2000
Low 1000
4. Pump release is performed.
5. Pump endurance running ends.
5.13.5 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the plot head.
You can operate the plot head according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown below.
Table 5-24 Set Items in Sequential Plotting Endurance Menu

TIP
Endurance Count
[Enter] key
Performing endurance running
5-63
5.13.6 General Endurance Menu

This menu performs the general endurance running.
You can operate various driving systems according to your desired settings.
The available settings are shown below.
Table 5-25 Set Items in General Endurance Menu

Running speed (CW, Set the carriage running 100, 120, 160, 200 Unit: cps
CCW) speed (CW direction,
CCW direction)
Media feed amount Set the media feed 0.1 to 100 Unit: mm
amount per cycle
TIP
• In the general endurance menu, the following operations are performed as one cycle of endurance
running
• Carriage stroking: 1 stroke
• Media feed: 1 cycle
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the carriage continuously repeats stroking
until cancel input is given from the operation panel.
CW-speed
[Enter] key
CCW-speed
[Enter] key
Media feed amount
[Enter] key
Endurance count
[Enter] key
Performing endurance running
5-64
5.13.7 Endurance Running Check Menu

In this menu, you can confirm the number of endurance running cycles that have been already finished.
The number of endurance running cycles is stored in NVRAM in the system. Therefore, even if a serious error
occurs during endurance running, you can confirm the number of finished cycles just before the occurrence
of the serious error.
Previous menu
Number of endurance running cycles
for the CR Motor
for the PF Motor
for the Cutter
for the Head Lock
for the Pump motor
for Sequential Printing
Number of general endurance running cycles
5.14 Media Feed Menu

In this menu, you can feed media into the printer frontward or backward.
The mechanical initialization should be done if it is not performed yet.
5-65
5.15 ExControl Menu

In this menu, you can diagnose the equipment on the controller board.
Table 5-26 Controller Board Check Item
Items Contents
Version Firmware, board revision -
Sensors Preheater thermistor, platen heater thermistor 1 and 2, -
after heater thermistor, ink ID for each cartridges, ink
NOT sensor for each cartridge, ink END sensor for each
ink.
Heater Preheater, platen heater, after heater -
History Maintenance history confirmation -
Previous menu
Next menu
5.15.1 Version
In this menu, you can check the ROM version of the controller board firmware, and the version of the
controller board. The firmware version (AP version) is displayed as “XX.XX“. The controller board version
is displayed in hex format (2 digit).
Previous menu
Next menu
5-66
5.15.2 Sensor
The status of the following sensors on the controller board is displayed.
• Preheater thermistor sensor

• Platen heater thermistor sensor 1 and 2
• After thermistor sensor
• Ink ID for each ink sensor
• Ink NOT sensor for each ink cartridge
• Ink END sensor for each ink
Previous menu
Pre Heater condition display

Platen Heater1 condition display

Platen Heater2 condition display

After Heater condition display
K Ink ID condition display
C Ink ID condition display
M Ink ID condition display

Y Ink ID condition display
Ink NOT sensor condition display
Ink END sensor condition display
Previous menu
5-67
5.15.3 Heater
In this menu, you can check whether preheater, platen heater, and after heater works properly or not. The
printer sets the temperature at 50°C and controls the selected heater process. Press [Cancel] key to stop the
operation.
If the temperature reaches to the set value, the printer keeps the temperature control.
Previous menu
[Enter] key㧔When selecting Pre㧕
Previous menu
Portrait

Parity

Total Result

Time of testing
Number of sending
Number of succeeding reception
Number of time out of sending

Number of Error reception
Number of Data Error
Previous menu
5-68
5.15.4 History
You can check the maintenance history of the controller board control device. The history is displayed in H
(hour) / M (min.) / S (sec.).
Total operating time of each heater shows the period from when the printer is used in self-diagnosis mode.
Daily operating time is not counted.
Previous menu
Time of using Pre Heater
Time of using Platen Heater

Time of using After Heater
Next menu
5.16 PaperInitial Menu

In this menu, you can set the media detection method in the self-diagnosis mode. The default value is the same
as the one in the normal operation mode.
Select either Top & Width / Width / Off. When Off is selected, you can set the media width in the media width
setting menu.
Table 5-27 Media Detection Item
Items Contents
Top & Width Normal media detection mode
Width Detects media width.
Off Does not detects media.
[Setting/value-]
key
[Setting/value+] [Setting/value-]
key key
[Setting/value+] [Setting/value-]
key key
[Setting/value+]
key
When set OFF
5-69
5-70
VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual 6 Maintenance Mode
6 Maintenance Mode
6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 6- 2
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode.......................................................... 6- 2
6.2.1 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode ............................................... 6-2
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode........................................................ 6-2
6.3 Maintenance Menu.................................................................................. 6- 3
6.3.1 Counter Display Menu ................................................................... 6-3
6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu ............................................................ 6-6
6.3.3 Counter Print Menu........................................................................ 6-7
6.3.4 Media Feed Menu .......................................................................... 6-8
6-1
6 Maintenance Mode VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual
6.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the maintenance mode.
The maintenance mode provides the user with functions of displaying and initializing the life counters. It is
used in the manufacturing process, adjustment, and maintenance.
The maintenance mode is implemented in the system firmware. All functions are available from the operation
panel.
TIP
"2.3 Part Names and Functions" p.2-3
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode

This section explains how to start up and operate the maintenance mode as well as provides the list of
available diagnosis items.
6.2.1 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode

To use the maintenance mode, you must first call up the maintenance menu on the operation panel.
The maintenance menu is completely independent of the normal operation mode and setup menu display
mode. To run the maintenance menu, follow the steps below.
1. If the system is in the operation mode or the setup

menu mode, press the [Power] key to turn the
power off.
2. While holding down [Roll/Sheet] key,
[Backward feed] key and [Printing mode] key in
the operation panel simultaneously, press
[Power] key.
The maintenance mode will start running and
display the maintenance menu.
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode

"5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode" p.5-6
6-2
6.3 Maintenance Menu

The maintenance menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 6-1 Diagnosis Items in Maintenance Menu

Counter: Indication Displays the life counter "6.3.1 Counter Display
Menu" p.6-3
Counter: Init Counter Initializes the life counter "6.3.2 Counter
Initialization Menu" p.6-6
Counter: Print Prints the life counter values "6.3.3 Counter Print
Menu" p.6-7
PaperFeed Feeds media into the printer frontward or backward "6.3.4 Media Feed
Menu" p.6-8
Previous menu
[Enter] key
Counter display
[Cancal] key
[Enter] key
Counter initialization
[Cancal] key
[Enter] key
Counter print
[Cancal] key
Media feed
[Cancal] key
Previous menu
6.3.1 Counter Display Menu

This menu displays the life counters. It consists of the following diagnosis items.
NOTE
All life counters are displayed in decimal number.
Table 6-2 Diagnosis Items in Counter Display Menu

Used Ink K Displays the ink consumption (K) counter.
Used Ink C Displays the ink consumption (C) counter.
Used Ink M Displays the ink consumption (M) counter.
Used Ink Y Displays the ink consumption (Y) counter.
Print Number Displays the total number of printed copies.
6-3
Table 6-2 Diagnosis Items in Counter Display Menu(Continued)

Waste Ink Displays the waste ink amount counter.
CR Motor Displays the life counter of the CR motor.
PF Motor Displays the life counter of the PF motor.
PUMP Displays the life counter of the pump unit.
HEAD K1, K2 Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (K).
HEAD C1, C2 Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (C).
HEAD M1, M2 Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (M).
HEAD Y1, Y2 Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (Y).
Cleaner Displays the life counter of the cleaning unit.
6-4

Ink consumption (K) counter

Ink consumption (C) counter
Ink consumption (M) counter
Ink consumption (Y) counter

Total number of printed copies
Waste ink amount counter
Life counter of the CR motor
Life counter of the PF motor
Life counter of the pump unit
Life counter of the head nozzle (K1)

Life counter of the head nozzle (K2)
Life counter of the head nozzle (C1)

Life counter of the head nozzle (C2)

Life counter of the head nozzle (Y1)
Life counter of the head nozzle (Y2)
Life counter of the head nozzle (M1)

Life counter of the head nozzle (M2)
Life counter of the cleaner head
Next menu
6-5
6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu

This menu initializes the life counters. The parameters that can be initialized in this menu are as follows.
Table 6-3 Diagnosis Items in Counter Initialization Menu

Print Num. Initializes the total print counter.
Waste Ink Initializes the waste ink amount counter.
Ink Initializes the ink amount counter.
All Initializes the life counter.
NVRAM Initializes the NVRAM.
Timer Initializes the timer.
CR Motor Initializes the CR motor life counter.
PF Motor Initializes the PF motor life counter.
Head Unit Initializes the head nozzle life counter.
Cleaning Initializes the life counter of the cleaning unit.
PUMP Initializes the life counter of the pump unit.
Shipping Batch initializing before shipping
(Print Num., CR Motor, PF Motor, Cleaning)
6-6
Previous menu [Enter]

key
6.3.3 Counter Print Menu

This menu prints the life counter values.
[Enter] key
After media is set
6-7
6.3.4 Media Feed Menu

This menu feeds media into the printer frontward or backward.
The mechanical initialization should be performed, if it is not performed yet.
6-8
VJ-1204 Maintenance Manual 7 Adjustment
7 Adjustment
7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 7- 3
7.2 Adjustment Item...................................................................................... 7- 3
7.3 Working with Dedicated Network Software.......................................... 7- 9
7.3.1 Parameter Backup ......................................................................... 7-9
7.3.2 Jigs and Tools................................................................................ 7-9
7.3.3 Required Environment ................................................................. 7-10
7.3.4 Receiving Parameters.................................................................. 7-13
7.3.5 Firmware Installation.................................................................... 7-14
7.3.6 Sending Parameters .................................................................... 7-18
7.3.7 Sub Controller Installation............................................................ 7-19
7.3.8 RTC Date & Time Setting ............................................................ 7-20
7.4 PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment.................................. 7- 21
7.4.1 Jigs and Tools.............................................................................. 7-21
7.4.2 Adjustment Procedure ................................................................. 7-21
7.5 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment ...................................... 7- 23
7.6 CR Belt Tension Adjustment ............................................................... 7- 25
7.7 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height) ................................................... 7- 26
7.8 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant) .......................................................... 7- 28
7.9 Cutter Holder Height Adjustment ........................................................ 7- 30
7.9.1 Jigs and Tools.............................................................................. 7-30
7-1
7 Adjustment VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual
7.10 PG Height Adjustment ..........................................................................7- 32
7.10.1 Jigs and Tools .............................................................................. 7-32
7.10.2 Adjustment Procedure .................................................................. 7-32
7.11 Media Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment .................................................7- 33
7.11.1 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ...................................... 7-33
7.11.2 P_REAR Sensor Adjustment........................................................ 7-36
7-2
VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual 7 Adjustment
7.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on necessary adjustment items and procedures.
TIP
7.2 Adjustment Item

This section describes the adjustment items required in part replacement procedures.
When you adjust or replace any of the maintenance parts listed in "Table 7-1 Adjustment Item List", you must
always adjust the printout quality using the self-diagnosis function referring to Table 7-1"Adjustment Item
List"(p.7-3).
Table 7-1 Adjustment Item List

Part replaced or Adjustment Adjustment item Reference
adjusted order
Printer head 1 Head rank input (including initial ink "(1) Head Rank"
charge) p.5-52
"5.6 Ink Charging
Menu" p.5-22
2 Head nozzle check "5.7.1 Head Nozzle
Check Menu" p.5-24
3 Head slant check (horizontal) "5.7.3 Head Slant
Check Menu" p.5-28
4 Head slant check (vertical) "5.7.3 Head Slant
Check Menu" p.5-28
5 Head slant adjustment (horizontal) "7.7 Head
Alignment (Horizontal
Height)" p.7-25
6 Head slant adjustment (vertical) "7.8 Head
Alignment (Vertical
Slant)" p.7-27
7 Uni-D / Bi-D Low Adjustment "5.7.5 Uni-D / Bi-D
Uni-D / Bi-D High Adjustment Low Adjustment" p.5-
32
"5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D
High Adjustment"
p.5-36
8 Test printing "5.7.8 Test
Printing Menu" p.5-41
9 Reset of head unit life counter "5.11.1 Parameter
Initialization Menu"
p.5-49
7-3
Table 7-1 Adjustment Item List(Continued)

adjusted order
Main board 1 Parameter backup "7.3.1 Parameter
assembly Backup" p.7-8
2 Firmware installation "5.7.1 Head Nozzle
Check Menu" p.5-24
3 Voltage input (no need for initial ink "5.7.4 Voltage
charge) Adjustment" p.5-30
Check Menu" p.5-24
32
"5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D
High Adjustment"
p.5-36
6 Side margin adjustment "5.7.7 Side Margin
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
7 P_REAR sensor position adjustment "7.11.2 P_REAR
Sensor Adjustment"
p.7-35
8 Media sensor sensitivity adjustment "7.11 Media
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-32
CR motor assembly 1 CR belt tension adjustment "7.6 CR Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-24
32
"5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D
High Adjustment"
p.5-36
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
7-4

adjusted order
PF motor assembly 1 PF speed reduction belt tension "(2) Confirming
adjustment Completion of
Installation to Plotter"
p.7-15
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
Sensor Adjustment"
p.7-35
P_EDGE sensor 1 Media sensor sensitivity adjustment "7.11 Media
assembly Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-32
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
P_REAR sensor 1 Media sensor sensitivity adjustment "7.11 Media
assembly Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-32
Sensor Adjustment"
p.7-35
Cover sensor 1 Cover sensor assembly mounting "7.7 Head
assembly position adjustment Alignment (Horizontal
Height)" p.7-25
PF_ENC assembly 1 PF_ENC assembly mounting position "7.11 Media
adjustment Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-32
2 PF_ENC inspection "5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
7-5

adjusted order
T fence 1 CR encoder inspection "5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17
32
"5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D
High Adjustment"
p.5-36
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
CR driven pulley 1 CR belt tension adjustment "7.6 CR Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-24
Cutter holder 1 Cutter holder assembly mounting "7.8 Head
assembly position adjustment Alignment (Vertical
Slant)" p.7-27
2 P_EDGE sensor adjustment "7.11.1 P_EDGE
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-32
3 Print margin adjustment "5.7.7 Side Margin
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
Carriage assembly 1 CR belt tension adjustment "7.6 CR Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-24
2 CR encoder inspection "5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17
3 Cutter holder assembly mounting "7.8 Head
position adjustment Alignment (Vertical
Slant)" p.7-27
4 P_EDGE sensor adjustment "7.11.1 P_EDGE
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-32
5 Sequential printing endurance operation "5.13.5 Print Head
check Endurance (Nozzle
Print) Menu" p.5-63
7-6

adjusted order
Carriage assembly 6 Head rank input "5.7.4 Voltage
(Continued) Adjustment" p.5-30
"5.13.5 Print Head
Endurance (Nozzle
Print) Menu" p.5-63
7 Print margin adjustment "5.7.7 Side Margin
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
Check Menu" p.5-24
9 Head slant check (horizontal) "5.7.3 Head Slant
Check Menu" p.5-28
10 Head slant check (vertical) "5.7.3 Head Slant
Check Menu" p.5-28
11 Head slant adjustment (horizontal) "7.7 Head
Height)" p.7-25
12 Head slant adjustment (vertical) "7.7 Head
Height)" p.7-25
32
"5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D
High Adjustment"
p.5-36
7-7
7.3 Working with Dedicated Network Software

On this printer, adjustment parameters can be downloaded and installed, also, the firmware can be installed
via network by using dedicated software. In case of main board replacement, work in the following order.
1. Setting up working environment: "7.3.3 Required Environment" p.7-9

2. Receiving parameters: "7.3.4 Receiving Parameters" p.7-12
3. Replacing main board: "4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly" p.4-21
4. Transferring firmware to printer: "(1) Firmware Transfer" p.7-13
5. Confirming completion of installation to printer: "(2) Confirming Completion of Installation to
Plotter" p.7-15
6. Sending parameters: "7.3.6 Sending Parameters" p.7-17
7.3.1 Parameter Backup

The NVRAM (Flash-Rom) installed on the main board assembly stores various parameters for the system
operation.
The available backup parameters are as follows.
. Panel setting parameters
. Mechanism adjustment parameters
. Main board-unique adjustment parameters
TIP
The main board-unique adjustment parameters cannot be erased or modified.
If the main board assembly is found to need replacement during maintenance operations, make sure to back
up the parameters. The backup data can be used to restore the original system status, omitting some
adjustment steps.
7.3.2 Jigs and Tools

The following jigs and tools are required for parameter backup.
• Windows PC:
• CPU: Pentium 400MHz or higher, Installed memory: 128MB or more
• With one of the following installed: Windows98/Windows98SE/WindowsMe/Windows2000/
WindowsXP
• Equipped with network port (RJ-45) (10M/100M Ethernet interface)
• With dedicated network software (MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant) installed
• Network crossover cable (For hub connection, network straight cable)
7-8
7.3.3 Required Environment

Before starting work, set up the following environment.
(1) Dedicated Network Software Startup and Printer IP Address Check

Once "MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant" is started, there is no need to exit it until a series of
processes completes.
1. Start "Mutoh Maintenance Engineer Assistant" from the shortcut on the desk top.
CAUTION
Never provide "MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant" to users because the software
enables upload of printer internal parameters to PCs.
2. From [Setup] menu, select [Option] and check if

the displayed address matches the printer IP
address. The default printer IP address is
"192.168.1.253". Then, click [OK].
CAUTION
For the IP address, use the default value as much as possible. If you want to use other
IP address, consult with the network administrator of the network to be connected.
(2) PC IP Address Setting

To set up on Windows XP with the default IP address on the printer, follow the steps below.
1. From [Control Panel], open [Network Connections].
7-9
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and select [Properties].
3. Double-click [Internet Protocol

(TCP/IP)].
4. In [IP address], input

any value of
"192.168.1.1" to
192.168.1.252" or
"192.168.1.254".
Any numerical value between 1 and 252,

or 254.
5. Click [OK] to finish the setting.
7-10
CAUTION
When the printer and PC are not directly connected with crossover cable but connected via
hub, the IP address needs to be different from that of devices on the network to be
connected. To connect via hub, consult with the network administrator.
(3) Starting Port Manager Mode

1. Connect the printer network port and PC network port with a network cable.
NOTE
When connecting the printer and PC on a one-to-one basis, use a "crossover cable". When connecting
the printer and PC via hub, use a "straight cable".
2. When the printer is in the operation status or in

the menu display status, press [Power] key to
turn the printer off.
3. While holding down [Back] key in the operation
panel, press [Power] key.
The LCD displays [Board Manager Mode]. If
[Back] key is released, the display turns to
“Waiting for command”.
NOTE
If "waiting for command" is not displayed, follow the steps below.
If IP address that is not default is displayed on the board, releasing [Back] key will display
[IP192.168.xxx.xxx] (depending on the set address) on the LCD. In this case, display either of the
default IP (IP 192.168.001.253) or the set IP address using [Forward feed] and [Backward feed],
and press [Enter]. Then, “waiting for command” will be displayed.
7-11
7.3.4 Receiving Parameters

This section describes the procedure to record backup parameters to the PC from the existing main board
assembly. To download backup parameters, follow the steps below.
1. Click [Parameter Receive].
2. In the "Parameter receive check" window, click

[OK]. Installation will start.
3. In the "Receive completed" window, click [OK].

"Save of receive parameter file" window opens.
4. Confirm the location to save and click [Save] to

determine it.
7-12
7.3.5 Firmware Installation

This section describes the procedure to install the firmware.
The NVRAM (Flash-Rom) on the main board assembly stores the programs (firmware) that control the
machine operations.
When performing the following maintenance works, always install the firmware.
• Replacing the main board assembly

• Updating the firmware
CAUTION
• Installing wrong firmware may disable printer startup. In this case, reinstallation with
special jig is required. Pay careful attention to the transferred file types.
(1) Firmware Transfer

The following explains the procedure to transfer firmware.
Follow the steps below.
NOTE
When connecting the printer and PC on a one-to-one basis, use "crossover cable". When connecting
the printer and PC via hub, use "straight cable".
1. Click [Firmware Install].

The "Select of installation file" window is
displayed.
7-13
2. Select a file to be transferred from the folder

where the firmware is saved, and click [Open].
3. In the "Firm installation check" window, click

[OK].
Installation will start.
4. If the "Transfer completed" window opens, click

[OK] to close the window.
CAUTION
Even after the "Transfer completed" window is closed, program installation to the printer is
not completed. Never power off the printer during the operation.
7-14
(2) Confirming Completion of Installation to Printer

Program installation to printer continues even after the "Transfer completed" window is closed. Check
whether the program is properly installed from the operation panel.
1. When firmware transfer starts, the LCD display

on the printer’s operation control panel changes
to [Program receiving].
The Data LED flashes.
㧼㨞㨛㨓㨞㨍㨙‫ޓ‬㨞㨑㨏㨑㨕㨢㨑㨕㨚㨓
2. The LCD display changes as follows:
Erasing ×× (×× is numeric)

Copying ×× (×× is numeric)
Comparing ×× (×× is numeric)
㧱㨞㨍㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓ‬㧜㧝
CAUTION
While the LCD display is in the Erasing to Comparing status, the power key is disabled. In
this situation, never disconnect the plug of the printer. Doing so may disable printer startup,
which will require reinstallation with special jig.
7-15
3. If the LCD displays [transfer complete], the

buzzer sounds three times and only the Power
LED turns on among all LEDs.
㨠㨞㨍㨚㨟㨒㨑㨞‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨙㨜㨘㨑㨠㨑
4. When [×××××× bytes recv (×× is numeric)] is

displayed, installation completes.
Turn off the printer and restart it. Then check the
version number displayed on the LCD.
㨠㨞㨍㨚㨟㨒㨑㨞‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨙㨜㨘㨑㨠㨑
NOTE
If an error occurs during installation, the buzzer sounds at intervals of 0.25 second, while the LCD
displays error message and all LEDs of Roll, Sheet, Color and Black & white flash. In this case,
follow the troubleshooting instructions. To stop the buzzer, press any key except for the power key
once. Pressing the key once again will return the LCD display to “waiting for command” and only
the Power LED on.
7-16
7.3.6 Sending Parameters
NOTE
Before sending parameters, perform the following work.
• Receiving parameters: "7.3.4 Receiving Parameters" p.7-12
• Firmware installation: "7.3.5 Firmware Installation" p.7-13
1. Click [Parameter Send].
2. When the "Select of send parameter file" window

opens, select the parameter file to be transferred
and click [Open].
3. In the "Parameter Send check" window, click

[OK].
Sending will start.
4. When sending completes and the "Send

completed" window opens, click [OK].
7-17
NOTE
Almost as soon as the "Send completed" window is displayed, writing to printer also finishes. If
writing to printer finishes successfully, the LCD displays the following:
Transfer complete
Buzzer sounds three times and only Power LED turns on. Then, when the LCD displays
16372 bytes recv
parameter writing completes.
7.3.7 Sub Controller Installation

This section describes installation procedures of sub control board firmware..
1. Click [Parameter Send].
2. When the "Select of send parameter file" window

opens, select the parameter file to be transferred
and click [Open].
3. In the "Parameter Send check" window, click

[OK].
Sending will start.
7-18
4. When sending completes and the "Send

completed" window opens, click [OK].
7.3.8 RTC Date & Time Setting

* Normally, this function is not used because this setting should be made in the “Time setting“ of the self-
diagnosis function.
"5.10 Time Setting" p.5-48
This section describe the procedure to transfer time setting on a PC to the RTC (Real Time Clock) on the main
board.
1. Click [Date & Time Install].
2. When the "Date & time installation check"

window opens, click [OK].
Installing will start.
3. When installing completes and the "Install

completed" window opens, confirm that the
installed date is correct, and click [OK].
7-19
7.4 PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the tension of the PF speed reduction belt.
When you have removed and installed the PF speed reduction belt, such as for PF motor removal, always
adjust the PF speed reduction belt tension.
Using PF belt tension adjustment jig, adjust the PF encoder position and the PF belt tension.

The jigs and tools required for PF speed reduction belt tension adjustment are as follows.
• Tension gauge: for measuring Max. 5,000gf (50N)
TIP
7.4.2 Adjustment Procedure

To adjust the PF speed reduction belt tension, follow the steps below.
1. Hook the tip of the tension gauge to the PF motor shaft.

No. Part name

1 PF bracket
2 PF motor
2. While pulling the tension gauge so that the graduation of PF belt tension adjusting jig indicates 40.0 ±
0.5N, tighten the screw.
7-20
CAUTION
During the operation, note the following points.

• The PF speed reduction belt tension specification is 40.0 ± 2.0N
• Since the specification includes the tension gauge error (1.5N), adjust to 40.0±0.5N in
actual adjustment, setting the error limit to half of one graduation (0.5N).
7-21
7.5 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the PF encoder assembly.
After replacing the PF encoder, adjust the PF encoder position.

To adjust PF encoder, follow the steps below.
1. Loosen the screws retaining the PF encoder assembly.
No. Part name

1 PF encoder assembly
2 PF encoder scale

2. Align the PF encoder assembly so that the corner covers the periphery of the PF encoder scale, then fix
the PF encoder assembly with screws.
No. Part name

1 PF encoder assembly
2 PF encoder scale
7-22
NOTE
Align the PF encorder so that the encorder scale slit periphery came very close to the corners of the
PF encorder.
PF encorder scale
come very close to
this point.
PF encorder scale
PF encorder
3. Attach the slit guide to the PF encoder assembly

No. Part name
1 Slit guide
2 Scale
3 PF scale assembly
4. Turn the scale around to check that the scale does not swing toward the speed reduction pulley from the
center of the encoder gap. If it swings, adjust the PF encoder assembly position again.
NOTE
There is no problem even if the scale hits the slit guide when turned around.
7-23
7.6 CR Belt Tension Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the tension of the CR belt.
When you have removed and installed the CR belt, adjust the CR belt tension.
1. Tighten the CR tension mounting shaft, and align the left side (viewed from the front of the printer) of
the graduation alignment pointer with the center line of graduations on the driven pulley base.
No. Part name

1 Driven pulley base
2 Driven pulley base graduations
3 Graduation alignment pointer
4 CR tension mounting shaft
2. After adjustment, apply adhesive material to the screw head of the CR tension mounting shaft not to
loosen it.
No. Part name
1 1 Driven pulley base graduations

2 CR tension mounting shaft screw
head
7-24
CAUTION
To align the graduation alignment pointer with the center line of driven pulley base, align the
left side (viewed from the front of the printer) of the pointer with the center line as shown
below.
Alignment pointer
L side R side
Align them like this. Alignment pointer
7.7 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)

This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant in horizontal direction.
When you have removed and installed the head assembly, such as for head assembly replacement, always
adjust the head slant and depth following the steps below.
NOTE
Before starting adjustment, remove the following parts.
• CR board cover: "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-48
• Cable cover R: "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-48
• Adjust the horizontal height of the head alignment before adjusting the vertical alignment slant of
head alignment.
• In this procedure, align the print head in the direction shown below.
Print head
7-25
1. Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode and print the adjustment patterns in "Head Slant Check
Menu 1".
"5.7.3 Head Slant Check Menu" p.5-28
2. Make adjustment based on the printed adjustment patterns.
OO $
#
OO
OO
% & '
A: Check the slant at this point.

C: OK
D: Move the head adjusting cam upward.
E: Move the head adjusting cam downward.
3. Move the head adjusting cam lever to adjust head slant.
No. Part name

1 Head adjusting cam
2 Head mounting plate
1
7-26
7.8 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant)

This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant in vertical direction.
After operation such as head assembly replacement, adjust the head slant according to the steps below.
NOTE
• CR board cover: "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-48
• Cable cover R: "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-48
• Before aligning print head in vertical direction, perform the alignment in horizontal direction.
"7.7 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)" p.7-25
• In this procedure, align the print head in the direction shown below.
Print head
1. Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode and print the adjustment patterns in "Head Slant Check
Menu".
"5.7.3 Head Slant Check Menu" p.5-28
7-27
2. Make adjustment based on the printed adjustment patterns.
Enter Serial Number (digit by digit)

A: Check the point to check the vertical slant angle.

C: OK
D: Move the vertical-slant adjusting tab to the right.
E: Move the vertical-slant adjusting tab to the left.
3. Loosen the vertical-slant adjusting tab screw and move the tab left and right to adjust the head vertical
angle.
No. Part name

1 Vertical-slant adjusting tab
2 Vertical-slant adjusting tab

screw
7-28
7.9 Cutter Holder Height Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the cutter holder height.

The following jigs and tools are required for cutter holder height adjustment.
• Cutter holder height adjusting jig
TIP

To make adjustment, follow the steps below.
NOTE
• CR cover: Step 2 to 4 in "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-48
(1) Media Guide L Mounting Position Adjustment

1. Loosen the three screws retaining the media guide L.
TIP
To loosen the leftmost screw on media guide L, use a Phillips screw driver by inserting it through the
gap in I/H assembly.
2. Attach the cutter positioning jig near (right side of) the retaining screw of media guide L.
NOTE
Before starting work, tentatively tighten the cutter holder.
7-29
3. Fully tighten the sub platen screw that is nearest to the origin, and place the cutter holder height adjusting
jig to the left side of the tightened screw.

No. Part name
1 Platen
2 Sub platen

3 Cutter holder height adjusting
jig
4. Place the cutter holder on the side face of the jig and hold the cutter holder down from above. While
making sure that the part indicated by a circle in the figure is sustained, fasten the tentatively-tightened
screw fully and determine the cutter holder height.
No. Part name

1 Cutter holder
2 Cutter holder height adjusting
jig
OOrOO
7-30
7.10 PG Height Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to check the carriage height (distance from the platen).

The following jigs and tools are required for carriage height (distance from the platen) check.
• PG height checking jig
TIP

Follow the steps below to adjust the platen height.
1. When moving the carriage, place the PG height checking jig onto the platen.
No. Part name

1 PG height checking jig
2 Platen
2. Move the carriage from the origin side while the lever is in "LOW".
3. Check that the carriage can pass through a gap above the 1.5mm part of the PG height checking jig and
cannot pass through a gap above the 1.7mm part.
No. Part name

1 PG height checking jig
2 Head

OO OO
7-31
4. Reverse the direction of the jig and move the carriage from the opposite side of the origin.
5. If this does not succeed, readjust the PG height.
7.11 Media Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the sensitivity of media sensor.
When you have removed and installed the sensors below or main board assembly, always adjust the
sensitivity of media sensor
• P_EDGE sensor
• P_REAR sensor
NOTE
• When you adjust the sensor sensitivity, note the following;
• Any ambient light, such as sun light or room light, does not interfere with the sensor.
• Keep the media holding lever down so that the media is stable on the sensor during adjustment.
If media is not securely held, the sensor detection accuracy may be decreased.
• Use non-conductive screwdriver when operating the trimmer on the main board assembly.
If a conductive screwdriver contacts with electronic component on the main board or frame, it
may cause a short-circuit.
• Before adjusting sensor sensitivity, perform the following work.
• Install all covers except for media guide R2.
"4.2 Removal of Covers" p.4-6
7.11.1 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
(1) Jigs and Tools

The following jigs and tools are required for P_EDGE sensor sensitivity adjustment.
• Test media: MF-3G (A4)
TIP
(2) Adjustment Procedure

To adjust the P_EDGE sensor, follow the steps below.
1. Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode.
7-32
NOTE
Start the self-diagnosis function before setting the test media. Otherwise, suction fan is not rotated
and you cannot get correct setting value.
TIP
"5.2.2 Starting Up" p.5-4
2. Select "Check: Test" from the self-diagnosis menu.

3. After confirming that the “check: Test“ is displayed in the operation panel, set the test media on the media
base position and down the media hold lever.
Confirm that the suction fan starts rotating.
NOTE
The suction fan will not be rotated if the [Enter] key is pressed before setting the test media. Make
sure to press the [Enter] key after setting the test media.
4. Select "Test4: Sensor" from the inspection menu.

5. Select "Sen6: Edge AD" from the sensor menu.
7. Press the cutter cap with a finger and release the carriage lock.
8. Move the carriage to the center of the test media.
7-33
9. Adjust the P_EDGE sensor adjusting volumes as shown below so that the value displayed in the operation
panel becomes "216 ± 10".
Counterclockwise: Sensitivity increases
Clockwise: Sensitivity decreases
• Trimmer R361: Rough adjustment
• Trimmer R365: Fine adjustment
Main board
1 2
No. Part name

1 Trimmer R361
2 Trimmer R365
10. Adjust the P_EDGE sensor adjusting volumes so that the value displayed in the operation panel becomes
"216 ± 10".
11. Move the paper edge sensor to the non reflective tape area.
No. Part name

Metal measure
1
2 Non reflective tape
12. Check that the value displayed in the operation panel is "80" or less.
7-34
7.11.2 P_REAR Sensor Adjustment
(1) Jigs and Tools

The following jigs and tools are required for P_REAR sensor adjustment.
• Test media: MF-3G (A4)
TIP
(2) Adjustment Procedure

To adjust the P_REAR sensor, follow the steps below.
1. Sets the standard media.

2. Start up the self-diagnosis function.
TIP
"5.2.2 Starting Up" p.5-4
3. Select "Check: Test" from the self-diagnosis menu.

4. Select "Test: Sensor" from the inspection menu.
5. Select "Sen: PaperRear AD" from the sensor menu.
7-35
7. Adjust the P_REAR sensor adjusting volumes as shown below so that the value displayed in the operation
panel becomes "216 ± 10".
Counterclockwise: Sensitivity increases
Clockwise: Sensitivity decreases
• Trimmer R371: Rough adjustment
• Trimmer R373: Fine adjustment
Main board
1 2
No. Part name

1 Trimmer R371
2 Trimmer R373
8. Remove the standard media.
9. Check that the value displayed in the operation panel is "216 ± 10".
10. Remove the standard media.
11. Check that the value displayed in the operation panel is "80" or below.
7-36
VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual 8 Maintenance
8 Maintenance
8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 8- 2
8.2 Periodical Services ................................................................................. 8- 3
8.3 Part Life Information............................................................................... 8- 4
8.4 Lubrication/Bonding............................................................................... 8- 6
8.5 Transportation of Plotter........................................................................ 8- 7
8-1
8 Maintenance VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual
8.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information about the periodical services, part life, lubrication/bonding, and transport.
WARNING
Before starting any maintenance work, always perform the following operations.
• Turn the printer. power OFF.
• Remove the power cable from the power outlet.
Not doing so may cause electric shock or damage to the electric circuit.
• Unplug the cables connected to the printer.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the printer.
CAUTION
• Make sure there is sufficient space around the printer when performing maintenance
work.
• When servicing the machinery inside with some covers removed, pay special attention
not to be injured by the driving mechanisms.
• Maintenance must be done by more than two person for the following work.
• When disassembling or reassembling the printer and the optional stand
• When packing the printer for transportation
8-2
8.2 Periodical Services

This section describes the periodical services required for this printer.
The periodical services ensures stable plotting quality of the printer.
Perform periodical inspections according to Table 8-1"Periodical Inspection Part List"(p.3) and perform
cleaning and part replacement as necessary.
TIP
• Operation manual
• Separate sheet “Exploded view” P.2-P.10
Table 8-1 Periodical Inspection Part List
Part Timing Check point Action

Media guide L Several times per • Media dust Clean it.
Sub platen front surface year accumulation
• Foreign objects
• Damages NOTE
If ink deposits
are present,
remove them
with a dampened
cloth and wipe
the area with a
clean dry cloth.
Timing fence Several times per • Media dust Clean it.

(CR encoder detection year accumulation
slit plate) • Foreign objects If any damages are found,
• Damages replace the part.
Rail on the CR guide Several times per Foreign objects Clean it.
frame year
P_REAR sensor front Several times per • Media dust Clean it.
surface year accumulation
• Foreign objects
Cleaner head Several times per • Ink deposits Clean it.
(Cleaning wiper) year • Damages
8-3
8.3 Part Life Information

This section shows how to check the life of the service parts.
To know the life of the service parts, check the maintenance counter from the counter display menu in the
maintenance mode.
TIP
"6.3.1 Counter Display Menu" p.6-3
Part life information of this printer is shown in the table below.
Table 8-2 List of Parts Life Expectancy

Part Life expectancy Warning How to Replacement References
display restore parts
Waste fluid tank Warning at Full Waste By Waste ink box
900,000 times of Ink Tank pressing (Replaced by
counting [Enter] users)
(equivalent to key while
-
900ml) replacing
the counter
to the new
one.
Cleaning unit 9,000 sheets *1 Warning Counter • Ink system "4.7.2
(Warning at 3,000 Wiper Life clear • Cleaner head Replacing
times of wiping) (Cleaning Pump Cap
wiper) Assembly"
• Flushing box p.4-61
• Absorber "4.7.3
under the Replacing
maintenance Cleaner Head
base absorber (Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-
63
"4.7.4
Replacing
Flushing Box
Assembly"
p.4-64
8-4
Table 8-2 List of Parts Life Expectancy (Continued)

Part Life expectancy Warning How to Replacement References
display restore parts
CR motor Approx. 20,000 E-161 Error Counter At the first "4.5.1 CR
sheets Ink Tube clear warning: Motor
(4600,000 passes • CR motor Assembly"
*2) • CR Driven p.4-38
pulley "4.5.5
(Check the ink Replacing CR
tube and the CR Driven
cable.) Pulley" p.4-44
At the next "4.10.2
warning: Replacing Ink
• CR cable Tube" p.4-76
besides above "4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-79
PF motor Counted only, not Counter Replace as "4.4.1
displayed clear necessary Replacing PF
- Motor
Assembly"
p.4-31
Print head Counted only, not Replace as "4.6.1
displayed necessary Replacing
-
Print Head"
p.4-48
*1 Plotting on A1 sheet at 5% print ratio

*2 Continuous plotting on A0 sheet with “Plain Paper /Image Speed-Mode”
8-5
8.4 Lubrication/Bonding
This section covers the lubrication/bonding information.
After disassembling/assembling this printer, always perform necessary lubrication/bonding according to
Table 8-3"Lubricant List"(p.6).
CAUTION
Only use specified lubricants and greases. The use of unauthorized lubricants and greases
may damage the components and shorten the printer life.
Table 8-3 Lubricant List
Parts Item Manufacturer Type Explode

d view
Cover section Roll receiver Apply to the top Dow Corning EM-60L
(L, R) cover contacting Asia Ltd.
surface.
Front cover Apply to the top Dow Corning EM-60L
support pin L cover contacting Asia Ltd.
surface.
CR section Cursor guide Apply to the front Mitsubishi Super multi-dia
surface. tetrat No.32
Pressure Apply to the Dow Corning EM-60L
shaft bearing peripheral surface. Asia Ltd.
Pressure Apply to the Dow Corning EM-60L
shaft stopper pressure lever Asia Ltd.
springs.
Head section Head cable Affix to each cable Not specified 10mm- width
(for locating and double faced
holding) tape
Cable guide CR cable Affix to each cable Not specified 10mm-width
section (for locating) double faced
tape
Tube guide Affix to the tube Not specified 10mm-width
guide (for double faced
locating) tape
Others Screw Apply to the area Three Bond Co., 1401 -
screw-locking Ltd.
agent is applied.
8-6
8.5 Transportation of Printer

This section describes how to transport the printer.
Before transporting the printer, you must package it in the same manner as it was delivered using protective
materials and packaging materials so that the printer will not be subject to excessive impact and vibrations
during the transportation.
Follow the steps below to package the printer.
(1) Task Before Transportation

1. Turn the printer power OFF.
2. Verify that the printer is in normal state.
3. Remove all ink cartridges.
4. Turn off the printer.
5. The operation panel shows “Transport Mode” and the printer begins ink discharging operation.
6. It takes about two minutes for discharging ink.
7. Check that ink discharging is complete and the Power lamp is off.
8. Remove the scroller.
9. Remove all cables including the power cable.
10. Fit the printer with protective materials.
TIP
Operation manual
11. If the optional stand is used, separate the printer from the stand.
TIP
Operation manual
12. Package the printer.
(2) Task After Transportation

1. Unpack, assemble, and install the printer.
2. Make the printer ready for operation.
8-7
8-8
VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual 9 Troubleshooting
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 9- 2
9.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages ................................................. 9- 2
9.2.1 Operation Status ............................................................................ 9-3
9.2.2 Errors with Message ...................................................................... 9-6
9.2.3 Data Errors................................................................................... 9-15
9.2.4 Command Errors.......................................................................... 9-17
9.2.5 Errors Requiring Reboot .............................................................. 9-18
9.2.6 Error Messages During File Transmission................................... 9-32
9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages ......................................... 9- 33
9.3.1 Initial Operation Problems............................................................ 9-33
9.3.2 Media Feed Problems.................................................................. 9-42
9.3.3 Printing Problems......................................................................... 9-46
9.3.4 Noise Problems............................................................................ 9-64
9.3.5 Media Cutting Problems............................................................... 9-68
9.3.6 Online Function Problems............................................................ 9-72
9.3.7 Other Problems............................................................................ 9-75
9.3.8 Problems in Using Dedicated Network Software ......................... 9-78
9-1
9 Troubleshooting VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual
9.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on possible causes of machine errors/damage and recovery actions.
If the machine is malfunctioning and an error message is displayed on the operation panel, refer to "9.2
Troubleshooting with Error Messages" p.9-2. If the machine is malfunctioning but no error messages are
displayed, refer to "9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages" p.9-34.
If cause of errors/damage and recovery actions are not found in this chapter, or the machine cannot restore to
normal status, please contact the distributor your purchased the product from or our customer support center.
9.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages

This section describes the messages displayed in normal operation and upon an error occurrence as well as
how to correct the error.
The available messages are as follows.
Table 9-1 Error Message Type
Priority Message type Contents Reference

1 Operation status Displayed when the machine is operating normally. "9.2.1
Operation
Status" p.9-3
2 Error with Displayed when an abnormal condition occurs "9.2.2
message during normal operation. Errors with
Message" p.9-5
3 Data error Displayed when a data communication error occurs "9.2.3 Data
between PC and the machine. Errors" p.9-12
4 Command error Displayed when an abnormal condition occurs "9.2.4
during analysis of PC commands. Command
Errors" p.9-14
5 Error requiring Displayed when a serious error critical to the "9.2.5
reboot machine operation occurs. Errors
Requiring
Reboot" p.9-15
9-2
9.2.1 Operation Status

This section describes the message contents, check items, and recovery actions for normal operation.
Table 9-2 Events and Check Items for Operation Status Messages
No. Message Event/ Check item Action Reference
symptom
1 Cover open Front cover is 1. Is cover sensor Tighten cover sensor "4.8.3
open. assembly loose? assembly screws. Replacing
Cover Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-70
2 Set media Media holding 2. Is cover sensor Correctly connect cover "4.3.3
lever is turned assembly cable sensor assembly cables Replacing
backward. connected securely? to main board assembly Main Board
connector J117. Assembly"
p.4-21
3. Does pressure lever Lubricate pressure cam. "8.4
move smoothly? Lubrication/
Bonding"
p.8-6
4. Is lever sensor Adjust lever sensor "4.5.3
assembly fitted assembly position. Replacing
correctly? Lever
Sensor" p.4-
40
5. Is sensor of lever Clean sensor face using "4.5.3
sensor assembly a swab. Replacing
contaminated? Lever
Sensor" p.4-
40
6. Is lever sensor Correctly connect lever "4.5.3
cable connected sensor assembly cables Replacing
securely? to main board assembly Lever
connector J132. Sensor" p.4-
40
7. Panel unit assembly Replace panel unit "4.2.2
may be damaged. assembly. Removing
Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
8. Panel cable may be Replace panel cable. "4.2.2
damaged. Removing
Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
9-3
Table 9-2 Events and Check Items for Operation Status Messages(Continued)
symptom
2 9. Check cover sensor Replace cover sensor "4.8.3
assembly operation assembly. Replacing
from "Sen: Cover" Cover Sensor
of self-diagnosis Assembly"
function. p.4-70
10. Check lever sensor Replace lever sensor "4.5.4
operation from assembly. Replacing T
"Sen: Lever" of self- Fence" p.4-41
diagnosis function.
11. Main board Replace main board "4.3.3
assembly may be assembly. Replacing
damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
3 No media Displayed in 1. Is P_EDGE sensor Securely connect it to "4.10.1
the following assembly cable at CR board assembly Replacing CR
cases: the head section connector J211. Board
• When connected Assembly"
media is correctly? p.4-75
not set
2. Is P_REAR sensor Securely connect it to "4.3.3
assembly under main board assembly Replacing
media guide R connector J114. Main Board
connected Assembly"
correctly? p.4-21
3. Check sensor Adjust with main board "7.11.1
sensitivity from assembly volume P_EDGE
"Sen: PaperEdge (R117, R119). Sensor
AD" of self- Replace P_EDGE Sensitivity
diagnosis function. sensor assembly. Adjustment"
p.7-32
4. CR board assembly Replace CR board "4.10.1
may be damaged. assembly. Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-75
5. Check presence of When "No media" is "4.9.2
media from "Sen: displayed even if media Replacing
PaperRear AD" of is set, replace P_REAR P_REAR
self-diagnosis sensor assembly. Sensor
function. Assembly"
p.4-74
6. CR cable may be Replace CR cable. "4.10.3
broken. Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-79
9-4
Table 9-2 Events and Check Items for Operation Status Messages(Continued)
symptom
damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9.2.2 Errors with Message

This section describes the contents of errors with messages as well as the check items and recovery actions.
These messages are displayed when an abnormal condition occurs while the machine is running.
Upon an occurrence of an error with message, the machine stops its operation at the same time.
The error can be cancelled by removing the error causes. After that, the machine will restart its operation.
Table 9-3 Symptoms and Check Items for Errors with Message
symptom
1 Media Media 1. Is P_EDGE sensor Securely connect it to "4.10.1
detection error detection failed assembly cable at CR board assembly Replacing CR
head connected connector J211. Board
correctly? Assembly"
p.4-75
under media guide main board assembly Replacing
R connected connector J130, J131. Main Board
correctly? Assembly"
p.4-21
3. Check sensor • Adjust with main "7.11.1
sensitivity from board assembly P_EDGE
"Sen: PaperEdge volume (R361, Sensor
AD" of self- R365). Sensitivity
diagnosis function. • Replace P_EDGE Adjustment"
sensor assembly. p.7-32
4. Is CR cable inserted Reconnect following "4.3.3

obliquely? connectors. Replacing
• Main board Main Board
assembly: J110 - Assembly"
J114 p.4-21
• CR board: J201 - "4.10.1
J205 Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-75
5. CR cable may be Replace CR cable. "4.10.3
broken. Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-79
9-5
Table 9-3 Symptoms and Check Items for Errors with Message(Continued)
symptom
1 6. CR board assembly Replace CR board "4.10.1
may be damaged. assembly. Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-75
self-diagnosis sensor. Sensor
function. Assembly"
p.4-74
damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
2 Media skew Media is 1. Set media again and If this error is caused by -
error running check reappearance. user's inappropriate
obliquely. media setting, instruct
correct media setting
procedure.
2. Is suction fan - Check connection of "4.9.1
judged as normal following main board Replacing
when checked assembly connectors. Suction Fan
through "Test: Fan" • Suction fan 1 cable: Assembly"
of self-diagnosis J128 p.4-73
function? • Suction fan 2 cable:
J127
• Suction fan L cable:
J126
• Replace suction fan
assembly.
• Replace cable of
suction fan that does
not operate
normally.
3. Is shielding material Remount it at specified -
secured at specified position.
position?
4. Check pressure Apply grease (G501) to "8.4
lever operation. pressure cam and make Lubrication/
adjustment. Bonding"
p.8-6
9-6
symptom
3 Remove media Displayed if 1. Does the same If the message appears, -
lever is raised message appear if refer to the action in
during printing turning machine check item No. 2.
or cutting OFF and turn it ON
media and then again?
lowered
2. Is pressure lever Check that LCD "5.5.4
without
detected as normal monitor displays lever Sensor
removing
when checked status correctly when Menu" p.5-15
media.
through "Sen: slowly raising/lowering
Lever" of self- pressure lever.
diagnosis function?
3. Check contact of • Reconnect main "4.3.3
lever sensor board assembly Replacing
assembly. connector J132. Main Board
• If LCD displays as Assembly"
chattering, sensor p.4-21
may be damaged. "4.5.3
Replace lever Replacing
sensor assembly. Lever
Sensor" p.4-
40
assembly under main board assembly Replacing
media guide R connector J130, J131. Main Board
connected Assembly"
correctly? p.4-21
self-diagnosis sensor assembly. Sensor
function. Assembly"
p.4-74
damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-7
symptom
4 [KCMY] Ink is running 1. Check which Remove all cartridges "5.5.4
Ink Near End short. Printing cartridge has no ink and lightly push the Sensor
[KCMY] is possible. from "Sen: Ink black resin lever of ink Menu" p.5-15
Ink End Ink has run out. NOT" of self- sensor assembly (K1,
Any printing diagnosis function. K2, C, M, Y) to check
operation stops that the display of "Sen:
immediately. Ink NOT" changes.
2. Check contact of the Reconnect following "4.3.3
ink sensor connectors. Replacing
assembly. MAIN board: J43 Main Board
HEATER JUNCTION Assembly"
board: p.4-21
• Connector J5(K)
• Connector J6(C)
• Connector J7(M)
• Connector J8(Y)
3. For the ink color • If ink color display "4.8.1
that is displayed as changes after Replacing
"Ink Near End" or replacing Ink Holder (I/
"Ink End", switch connector: H)
ink sensor assembly Ink sensor assembly Assembly"
connector with that is damaged. p.4-66
of normally Replace ink sensor
displayed ink color. assembly.
• If ink color display
does not change "4.3.3
after replacing Replacing
connector: Main Board
Main board Assembly"
assembly may be p.4-21
damaged.Replace
main board
assembly.
9-8
symptom
5 [KCMY] Cartridge is not 1. Turn machine OFF. If message appears: -
No Cartridge installed. Turn it ON again Refer to action in check
and check if the item No. 2.
same message
appears.
2. Check presence of Remove all cartridges "5.5.4
ink cartridge from and lightly push the Sensor
"Sen: Ink NOT" of switch of ink NOT Menu" p.5-15
self-diagnosis sensor assembly (K, C,
function. M, Y) with something
with a flat tip such as
ballpoint pen to check
that the display of "Sen:
Ink NOT" changes.
3. Check contact of Reconnect following "4.3.3
ink NOT sensor connectors. Replacing
assembly MAIN board: J43 Main Board
connector. HEATER JUNCTION Assembly"
board: p.4-21
• Connector J5(K)
• Connector J6(C)
• Connector J7(M)
• Connector J8(Y)
4. For the ink color If ink color displayed as "4.8.1
that is displayed as "No ink" changes after Replacing
"Little ink" or "No replacing connector: Ink Holder (I/
ink", switch ink Ink sensor assembly is H)
NOT sensor damaged. Replace ink Assembly"
assembly connector sensor assembly. p.4-66
with that of
If ink color displayed as "4.3.3
normally displayed
"No ink" does not Replacing
ink color.
change after replacing Main Board
connector: Assembly"
Main board assembly p.4-21
may be damaged.
Replace main board
assembly.
9-9
symptom
6 Insert specified Specified ink 1. Check if the same If the message appears: -
cartridge cartridge is not message appear if Refer to the action in
installed. turning machine check item No. 2.
OFF and turn it ON
again.
2. Check if specified Replace ink cartridge Operation
ink cartridge is with specified one. Manual
used.
3. Check if ink If detection does not "4.8.1
cartridge status operate normally, Replacing
detection operates replace following parts. Ink Holder (I/
normally from "Ink • Ink sensor assembly H)
Not" of self- • Main board Assembly"
diagnosis function. assembly p.4-66
• Ink ID sensor "4.3.3
assembly Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
4. Check contact of - Reconnect following "4.3.3
ink ID sensor main board assembly Replacing
assembly connectors. Main Board
connector. MAIN board: J43 Assembly"
HEATER JUNCTION p.4-21
board:
• Connector J5(K)
• Connector J6(C)
• Connector J7(M)
• Connector J8(Y)
If no change occurs,
proceed to step (5).
9-10
symptom
7 5. For cartridge that is • If cartridge "4.8.1
displayed as NG in displayed as NG Replacing
"Sen: Ink NOT" of changes: Ink Holder (I/
self-diagnosis Ink ID sensor H)
function, replace assembly displayed Assembly"
ink ID sensor as NG is damaged. p.4-66
assembly connector Replace defective
with that of ink ID sensor
normally displayed assembly.
cartridge.
• If cartridge "4.3.3
displayed as NG Replacing
does not change, or Main Board
all units are Assembly"
displayed as NG: p.4-21
Main board
assembly may be
damaged. Replace
main board
assembly.
7 Warning: Waste fluid 1. Turn machine OFF. If the message appears: -
Waste fluid box is almost Turn it ON again Refer to the action in
box full full. and check if the check item No. 2.
same message
appears.
2. Waste ink in waste Replace waste fluid box. Operation
fluid box reaches Manual
full level.
damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
8 Warning: Ink Ink tube life 1. Turn machine OFF. If the message appears: -
tube life has almost Turn it ON again Refer to the action in
expired. and check if the check item No. 2.
same message
appears.
2. Use of ink tube has Replace ink tube. "4.10.2
exceeded specified Replacing
level. Ink Tube"
p.4-76
damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-11
symptom
9 Out of memory Memory is 1. Check RAM size Memory size is 128MB. "5.5.1
DIMM 64MB insufficient for from "Test: Ram If the displayed value is Memory Size
data analysis/ Capacity" of self- less than the memory Menu" p.5-12
printing. diagnosis function. size of the model, the
Required DIMM may be
memory size is damaged.
displayed. Replace the DIMM.
damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
NOTE
• The square bracket pair in an error message contains the applicable ink color.
• If no ink and no cartridge occur at the same time, no cartridge message has priority to be displayed.
9.2.3 Data Errors

This section describes the message contents of data errors as well as the check items and recovery actions.
These errors are displayed when a communication error occurs between the PC and the machine.
Upon an occurrence of a data error, the machine stops its operation at the same time.
9-12
Table 9-4 Symptoms and Check Items for Data Errors

symptom
1 I 15-1 error Online frame 1. Attempt • Contact our
command [ ] error communication customer support
using PC and cable center.
2 I 15-2 error Overrun error
on hand.
command [ ]
3 I 15-3 error Online parity • Replace application
2. Is there any error
command [ ] error driver.
statement in "4.3.3
4 I 05 error Sum check printing data? Replacing
command [ ] error • Obtain printing Main Board
data. Assembly"
5 I 07 error ECS parameter 3. Does the symptom
command [ ] remain the same • Contact our p.4-21
even if application customer support
driver is replaced? center.
4. Main board • Replace main board

assembly may be assembly.
defective.
6 I 11 error Undefined 1. Attempt • Contact our
command [ ] ESC communication customer support
using PC and cable center.
7 I 12 error Unauthorized
on hand.
command [ ] character ESC
• Replace application
8 I 13 error Numeral driver.
2. Is there any error
command [ ] character ESC
statement in "4.3.3
9 I 14 error Parameter error printing data? Replacing
command [ ] ESC • Obtain printing Main Board
data. Assembly"
10 I 16 error Buffer 3. Does the symptom
command [ ] overflow remain the same • Contact our p.4-21
even if application customer support
driver is replaced? center.
4. Main board • Replace main board

assembly may be assembly.
defective.
NOTE
The square bracket pair in a message may contain the applicable command code.
9-13
9.2.4 Command Errors

This section describes the message contents of command errors as well as the check items and recovery
actions.
These errors are displayed when an abnormal condition is found during analysis of PC command data.
Upon an occurrence of a command error, the machine stops its operation at the same time.
Table 9-5 Symptoms and Check Items for Command Errors

symptom
1 MH 01 Error Undefined 1. Attempt • Contact our "4.3.3
Command [ ] command: communication customer support Replacing
Command using PC and cable center. Main Board
being analyzed on hand. Assembly"
is not defined p.4-21
in applicable
command
mode. 2. Is there any error • Replace application
statement in driver
2 MH 02 Error Parameter
Command [ ] error: printing data?
Number of
parameters
following • Obtain printing
3. Does the symptom
command is data.
inappropriate. remain the same
even if application • Contact our
3 MH 03 Error Numeral value driver is replaced? customer support
Command [ ] error: center.
Number of
parameters
following 4. Main board
command is assembly may be • Replace main board
inappropriate. defective. assembly.
4 MH 04 Error Undefined
Command [ ] character set:
Unknown
character set is
present.
5 MH 07 Error Buffer
Command [ ] overflow:
Polygon buffer
or
downloadable
character
buffer
overflows.
9-14
NOTE
• The square bracket pair in a message may contain the applicable command code.
• For the PC settings, refer to your PC's operation manual.
9.2.5 Errors Requiring Reboot

This section describes the contents of reboot-requiring errors as well as the check items and recovery actions.
These errors are issued when any of the following critical problems occurs.
• Obstacle that prevents the machine's operation
• Damage of electric circuits (boards, motors, sensors)
• Abnormal operation of control programs
When any of the above conditions occurs, the machine follows the steps shown below before stopping its
operation.
1. Turn OFF the driving system power automatically.
2. Flash all lamps in the operation panel and generate intermittent audible alarm.
3. Display the applicable error message on the LCD.
The error can be cancelled by removing the error causes and restarting the machine.
(1) CPU system serious error

Table 9-6 Symptoms and Check Items for CPU System Serious Errors
symptom
1 E 001 error Standard Main board assembly Replace main board "4.3.3
DRAM DRAM error: may be defective. assembly. Replacing
Abnormal Main Board
condition in Assembly"
standard p.4-21
memory
mounted on
main board
assembly
9-15
Table 9-6 Symptoms and Check Items for CPU System Serious Errors (Continued)
symptom
2 E 016 error Interruption 1. Check AC power Contact our customer Operation
CPU Err exception supply and printer support center. Manual
[00] error: surrounding
Abnormal equipment.
condition in
2. Check reappearance
interruption
by turning ON/OFF
process.
the machine power
3 E 016 error Command several times. Make
CPU Err border sure to perform this
[02] exception/TLB check repeatedly
exception (load even if no problems
or command seem to be present.
fetch) error: (Make the same
Abnormal condition as user's.)
condition in
command
border.
Or TLB
exception in
data load or
command
fetch.
4 E 016 error Data border 1. Check serial • Contact our "4.3.3
CPU Err exception/TLB number of the customer support Replacing
[03] exception printer. center. Main Board
(store) error: • Replace main board Assembly"
2. Main board
Abnormal assembly. p.4-21
assembly may be
condition in
defective.
data border.
Or TLB
exception in
data storing.
5 E 016 error Address
CPU Err exception error
[04] (load or
command
fetch):
Address error
in command
load or fetch.
6 E 016 error Address
CPU Err exception error
[05] (store):
Address error
in saving
process.
9-16
symptom
7 E 016 error Address 3. Check serial • Contact our "4.3.3
CPU Err exception error number of the customer support Replacing
[06] (command printer. center. Main Board
fetch): • Replace main board Assembly"
4. Main board
Address error assembly. p.4-21
assembly may be
in command
defective.
loading or
storing
8 E 016 error Bus exception 1. Check serial • Contact our "4.3.3
CPU Err error (load or number of the customer support Replacing
[07] store): printer. center. Main Board
Bus error in Assembly"
2. Main board
command • Replace main board p.4-21
assembly may be
loading or assembly.
defective.
storing
9 E 016 error System call
CPU Err exception
[08] error:
Abnormal
condition in
system call
10 E 016 error Break point

CPU Err exception
[09] error:
Abnormal
condition in
break point
11 E 016 error Reserved
CPU Err command
[10] exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
reserved
command
12 E 016 error Coprocessor
CPU Err disabled
[11] exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
coprocessor
9-17
symptom
13 E 016 error Arithmetic 1. Check AC power • Contact our
CPU Err overflow supply and printer customer support
[12] exception surrounding center.
error: equipment.
Overflow
2. Check reappearance
occurs
by turning ON/OFF
14 E 016 error Trap exception the machine power
CPU Err error: several times. Make
[13] Trap occurs sure to perform this
check repeatedly
15 E 016 error Floating point
even if no problems
CPU Err exception
seem to be present.
[15] error:
(Make the same
Abnormal
condition as user's.)
condition in
floating point 3. Check serial • Contact our
process number of the customer support
printer. center.
16 E 016 error Watch
"4.3.3
CPU Err exception 4. Main board • Replace main board Replacing
[22] error: assembly may be assembly. Main Board
Abnormal defective. Assembly"
condition in
p.4-21
watch
17 E 016 error Watchdog
CPU Err time-out
[32] exception
error:
Time-out in
watchdog
18 E 016 error Abort error:
CPU Err Process
[33] aborted
19 E 237 error Transfer
Transfer memory error:
memory Abnormal
condition in
transfer of
analyzed
printer data.
NOTE
For the PC settings, refer to your PC's operation manual.
9-18
(2) Mechanical Serious Errors

Table 9-7 Symptoms and Check Items for Mechanical Serious Errors
symptom
1 E 065 error Abnormal 1. Check error history - "5.5.7
PF motor condition in PF from "Test: Elec." History
motor (X-axis) of self-diagnosis Menu" p.5-18
during printer function.
operation.
2. Set the number of
Displayed if "4.3.3
endurance running
the difference Replacing
cycles to 50 or more
between motor Main Board
from "Life: PF
command Assembly"
motor" of self-
value and p.4-21
diagnosis function,
feedback from Check connection of
and check if "X
encoder is following main board
motor error" occurs.
large. assembly connectors.
3. Check "Encoder: • PF motor cable
PF" from "Test: assembly
Encoder" of self- connector: J20
diagnosis function. • PF_ENC assembly
4. Check if Main connector: J12
Power Board • If NG, check
normally supplies connection of main "4.4.1
DC24V. board assembly Replacing PF
connector: J12. Motor
5. PF motor assembly
may be defective. • Replace PF motor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-31
6. Main board "4.3.3

• Replace main board
assembly may be Replacing
assembly.
defective. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-19
Table 9-7 Symptoms and Check Items for Mechanical Serious Errors (Continued)
symptom
PF encoder condition in from "Test: Elec." History
media feed of self-diagnosis Menu" p.5-18
amount (X- function.
axis) during
printer Check connection of "4.3.3
endurance running
operation. following main board Replacing
Displayed if assembly connectors. Main Board
from "Life: PF
there is no • PF motor cable Assembly"
motor" of self-
feedback from assembly p.4-21
diagnosis function,
encoder. connector: J20
and check if "X
motor error" occurs. • PF_ENC assembly
connector: J12
3. Check "Encoder:
• If NG, check
PF" from "Test:
connection of main
Encoder" of self-
board assembly
diagnosis function.
connector: J12.
4. Check if Main
Power Board • Replace PF motor
normally supplies assembly. "4.4.1
DC24V. Replacing PF
5. PF motor assembly • Replace main board Motor
may be defective. assembly. Assembly"
p.4-31

Assembly"
p.4-21
9-20
symptom
3 E069 error Time-out 1. Check error history - "5.5.7
PF time-out condition in from "Test: Elec." History
media feed of self-diagnosis Menu" p.5-18
amount (X- function.
axis) during
printer Check connection of "4.3.3
endurance running
operation. following main board Replacing
Displayed if assembly connectors. Main Board
from "Life: PF
pressure roller • PF motor cable Assembly"
motor" of self-
does not reach assembly p.4-21
diagnosis function,
the defined connector: J20
and check if "X
position. • PF_ENC assembly
motor error" occurs.
connector: J12
3. Check "Encoder:
• If NG, check
PF" from "Test:
connection of main
Encoder" of self-
board assembly
diagnosis function.
connector: J12.
4. Check if Main
DC24V. Replacing PF
p.4-31

Assembly"
p.4-21
9-21
symptom
4 E071 error Overload 1. Check error history - "5.5.7
PF overcurrent condition in PF from "Test: Elec." History
motor (X-axis) of self-diagnosis Menu" p.5-18
5 E079 error
during printer function.
PF2
operation.
overcurrent 2. Set the number of
Check connection of "4.3.3
endurance running
following main board Replacing
assembly connectors. Main Board
from "Life: PF
• PF motor cable Assembly"
motor" of self-
assembly p.4-21
diagnosis function,
connector: J20
and check if "X
motor error" occurs. • PF_ENC assembly
connector: J12
3. Check "Encoder:
• If NG, check
PF" from "Test:
connection of main
Encoder" of self-
board assembly
diagnosis function.
connector: J12.
4. Check if Main
DC24V. Replacing PF
p.4-31

Assembly"
p.4-21
9-22
symptom
Y motor condition in from "Test: Elec." History
CR motor (Y- of self-diagnosis Menu" p.5-18
axis) during function.
printer • Clean and lubricate "8.4
2. Move carriage in
operation. CR rail roller guide. Lubrication/
both directions
Displayed if Bonding"
while the printer is • Check connection
the difference of following p.8-6
turned off, and
between motor connectors.
check if there is any
command
position where Main board:
value and "4.3.3
carriage does not • CR motor assembly
feedback from Replacing
move smoothly. connector: J21
encoder is Main Board
large. 3. Set the number of • CR cable connector: Assembly"
endurance running J9 - J11 p.4-21
7 E 068 error Abnormal
Y encoder condition in cycles to 50 or more CR board:
head travel from "Life: CR • CR cable connector:
distance (Y- motor" of self- J201 - J205
axis) during diagnosis function,
printer and check if "Y
operation. motor error" occurs.
Displayed if
there is no
feedback from
encoder.
9-23
symptom
8 E 070 error Time-out 4. Check if T fence is • If grease or dust "4.5.4
CR time-out condition in contaminated or collect: Wipe fence Replacing T
head travel worn out. with a dry cloth. Fence" p.4-41
distance (Y- • If ink deposit
axis) during presents: Wipe it off
printer with cloth
operation. dampened with
Displayed if neutral detergent.
carriage does "4.5.4
not reach the • If contamination or Replacing T
defined deposit is too heavy: Fence" p.4-41
position. Replace T fence.
5. Check "Y Encoder" a) If NG:
9 E 072 error Overload
from "Test: Check following cable
CR overcurrent condition in
Encoder" of self- connection. "4.5.4
CR motor (Y-
10 E074 error diagnosis function. • CR board assembly Replacing T
axis) during
CR2 connector J207 Fence" p.4-41
printer
overcurrent b) Replace following "4.5.1 CR
operation.
parts. Motor
• T fence Assembly"
• CR motor assembly p.4-38
• CR board assembly "4.10.1
• CR cable Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
• Replace main board p.4-75
assembly. "4.10.3
6. Main board Replacing CR
assembly may be Tape Wire"
damaged. p.4-79
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-24
symptom
11 E 081 error CR_HP 1. Check CR_HP • Check connection "5.5.4
CR origin detection is not sensor from "Sen: of CR_HP sensor Sensor
possible. CR Origin" of self- cable assembly Menu" p.5-15
diagnosis function. connector.
2. CR_HP sensor may • Replace CR_HP "4.5.2
be damaged. sensor. Replacing
CR_HP
Sensor" p.4-
39
3. Main board • Replace main board "4.3.3
assembly may be assembly Replacing
damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
12 E 082 error Abnormal • Wiper sensor 1. Check connection "4.7.3
wiper sensor condition in assembly may be of wiper sensor Replacing
wiper sensor. faulty. connector. Cleaner Head
• Main board (Cleaning
2. Replace wiper
assembly may be Wiper)" p.4-
sensor.
faulty. 63
3. Replace main board "4.3
assembly. Replacement
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-17
13 E 077 error Abnormal 1. Main board Replace main board "4.3.3
H overheat condition in assembly may be assembly. Replacing
head driver. damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-25
symptom
14 E 075 error Abnormal 1. Check connection Reconnect head cable. "4.6.1
H cable condition in of head cable Replacing
head cable or connectors on CR Print Head"
head board assembly side p.4-48
thermistor. and head side. "4.10.1
• Is head cable Replacing CR
inserted obliquely? Board
Assembly"
• Is it locked p.4-75
securely?
2. Is head cable Replace head cable. "4.6.1
broken? Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-48
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-75
3. Head thermistor Replace Print head "4.6.1
may be faulty. assembly. Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-48
15 E 076 error Abnormal Disconnection of 1. Reconnect "4.4.4
preheater condition in connector, wrong connector of Replacing
system preheater wiring, or heater thermistor and Heater and
system malfunction of heater. Thermistor
(thermistor, thermistor and heater Assembly"
2. Check connection
heater). may be occurred. p.4-34
of board section.
"4.3
3. Replace heater. Replacement
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-17
9-26
symptom
16 E 076 error Abnormal Disconnection of 1. Reconnect
platen heater condition in connector, wrong connector of
system platen heater wiring, or heater thermistor and
system malfunction of heater.
(thermistor, thermistor and heater
2. Check connection
heater). may be occurred.
of board section.
3. Replace heater.
after heater condition in
system after heater
system
(thermistor,
heater).
18 E 079 error Abnormal • Communicaiton 1. Check connection "4.3
communica- condition in cable may be faulty. between main board Replacement
tion error serial commu- • F/W on controller to controller board. of Board Base
nication board may be faulty. 2. Check connection Section
between main Components
• Controller board between junction
board to " p.4-17
assembly may be board to controller
controller "5.5.2
faulty. board.
board during Version
printing 3. Check firmware Menu" p.5-13
operation. version and install "7.3.5
the latest version. Firmware
Installation"
junction error condition in 4. Replace controller p.7-13
serial commu- board or main
nication board.
between
junction board
to controller
board during
printing
operation.
20 E 084 error Installed head Installed head is not Replace head. "4.6.1
head is incorrect. manifactured by other Replacing
identification vendor. Print Head"
p.4-48
21 E 085 error Abnormal 1. Main board Replace main board "4.3
head overheat condition in assembly may be assembly. Replacement
head driver. damaged. of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-17
9-27
symptom
22 E 086 error Abnormal Head or head cable may 1. Check connection "4.6
head OVP condition in be damaged. of head cable. Replacement
head driver. of Head
2. Replace head.
Section
Components
" p.4-48
23 E 087 error Abnormal Temperature 1. Replace thermistor. "4.4.4
head transistor condition in abnormality of head Replacing
2. Replace main
thermistor head transistor. transistor on main board Heater and
board.
or sensor abnormality of Thermistor
thermistor may be Assembly"
occurred. p.4-34
"4.3
Replacement
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-17
24 E 097 error Abnormal Replace main board "4.3.3
NVRAM condition in assembly. Replacing
NVRAM. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-28
9.2.6 Error Messages During File Transmission

This section describes the error messages displayed when sending backup parameters and firmware using
dedicated online software, as well as their recovery actions.
Table 9-8 Error Messages During File Transmission

symptom
1 Transfer failed Firmware data Check if transferred After confirming it, "7.3.5
Data format format is firmware is an install firmware again. Firmware
error inappropriate. appropriate file. Installation"
p.7-13
2 Transfer failed Cancel button - Transfer firmware
Aborted by the on PC has been again.
HOST pressed.
3 Transfer failed Communication Check connection After resolving
Data timeout time-out between printer and PC. problem, transfer
occurred. firmware again.
4 Transfer failed File checksum - 1. Transfer firmware
Check-sum error. again.
error
2. If error message is
still displayed,
check if transferred
firmware is an
appropriate file.
5 Transfer failed Received Check if program file is After confirming it,
Wrong size wrong size appropriate. transfer data again.
xxxxxxxx data.
6 Transfer failed Incompatible Check if program file is After confirming it, "7.3.5
Incompatible firmware. appropriate. install firmware again. Firmware
F/W Installation"
p.7-13
7 Transfer failed ROM erase Board may be defective. Replace main board. "4.3.3
Flash erase error. Replacing
error Main Board
Assembly"
8 Transfer failed ROM writing
p.4-21
Flash write error.
error
9 Transfer failed ROM
Flash compare comparing
error error.
10 Transfer failed FROM written Normally not detected.
Unknown in unknown FROM may be
Flash size method is defective.
detected.
9-29
Table 9-8 Error Messages During File Transmission (Continued)

symptom
11 Internal Error No memory Normally not occurred. • Replace SODIMM. "4.3.3
Memory area is SODIMM may be • Replace main Replacing
Exhausted available. defective. board. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
12 Transfer failed “Block reply Check connection • Reconnect control "4.3.4
Block replay timeout” between control board board and main Replacing
timeout occurred and main board. board.
HEATER
during system • Replace the cable CONT board
code transfer. connecting control assembly"
13 Transfer failed Invalid value is board and main
p.4-22
Block replay received during board.
"4.3.3
error xx system code • Replace control Replacing
transfer. board.
Main Board
14 Transfer failed “Final reply • Replace main Assembly"
Final reply timeout“ board.
p.4-21
timeout occurred
during system
code transfer.
15 Transfer failed Invalid value is
Final reply received during
error xx final system
code transfer.
9-30

symptom
16 Boot Transfer Opening • Check connection • Reconnect control "4.3.4
failed sequence of between control board and main Replacing
Opening seq. boot code board and main board. Otherwise, HEATER
failed transfer failed. board. replace the cable CONT board
• Check if the green connecting control assembly"
LED on control board and main p.4-22
board is lit. board. "4.3.3
• If the green LED on Replacing
• Check if the red Main Board
LED on control control board is off
after the power is Assembly"
board is blinking. p.4-21
turned on, replace
the control board. " 7 . 3
• If the red LED is Working with
blinking and there is Dedicated
no problem at Network
connection between Software"
control board and p.7-8
main board, try to
reinstall firmware.
• If the red LED is
off, perform the
following
procedures.
1. Turn off the power,
then switch the DIP
switch as follows:
1: ON
2: ON
3: ON
4: OFF
2. Start the board
manager mode.
3. Reinstall firmware.
4. Turn off the power,
then switch the DIP
switch as follows:
1: ON
2: OFF
3: ON
4: OFF
5. Turn on the power,
then check if the red
LED is blinking.
9-31

symptom
17 Boot Transfer AA did not Check connection • Reconnect control "4.3.4
failed replied to Step between control board board and main Replacing
55-AA 55 of boot code and main board. board. HEATER
Timeout transfer. • Replace the cable CONT board
connecting control assembly"
18 Boot Transfer xx replied to
board and main p.4-22
failed Step 55 of boot
55-AA reply code transfer. board. "4.3.3
error xx • Replace control Replacing
board. Main Board
19 Boot Transfer An error (xx)
• Replace main Assembly"
failed replied to
End code xx transfer end of board. p.4-21
boot code.
20 Boot Transfer Transfer
failed sequence echo
Echo timeout of boot code
did not reply.
21 Boot Transfer Invalid transfer
failed sequence echo
Echo error xx of boot code
did not reply.
22 Internal error Failed in Normally not occurred. Replace main board. "4.3.3
Parameter save writing FROM may be Replacing
error parameter. defective.
Main Board
23 Transfer failed Invalid year SODIMM or main • Replace SODIMM. Assembly"
Wrong year data (xxxx) board may be defective. • Replace main p.4-21
xxxx received. board.
24 Transfer failed Invalid month
Wrong month data (xx)
xx received.
25 Transfer failed Invalid day
Wrong date data (xx)
xx received.
26 Transfer failed Invalid hour
Wrong hour data (xx)
xx received.
27 Transfer failed Invalid minute
Wrong min data (xx)
xx received.
9-32

symptom
28 Transfer not Transfer is not Check if LED display Press any button on " 7 . 3
ready available. on operation panel is in operation panel to make Working with
waiting status of board the panel display
Dedicated
manager mode. waiting state. Then,
Network
reinstall the software.
Software"
p.7-8
9-33
9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages

This section describes the symptoms of errors without an error message as well as the check items and
recovery actions.
9.3.1 Initial Operation Problems
Table 9-9 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Initial Operation Problems
No. Symptom Check item Action Reference

1 Machine power 1. Is operation panel Replace panel cable. "4.2.2
cannot be turned ON unit assembly cable Removing
broken or shorted? Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
2. Panel unit assembly Replace panel unit "4.2.2
may be damaged. assembly. Removing
Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
3. Inlet assembly may Replace inlet assembly. "4.3.8
be defective. Replacing
Inlet
Assembly"
p.4-29
4. Power board Replace power board "4.3.6
defective. Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-27
2 Abnormal LCD 1. Check power supply Replace power board "4.3.6
operation (no voltage (AC100V). assembly. Replacing
displays/garbled Power Board
characters) Assembly"
p.4-27
2. Check power supply Replace power board "4.3.6
voltage (DC5V). assembly. Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-27
voltage (DC24V, assembly. Replacing
DC42V). Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-27
9-34
Table 9-9 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Initial Operation Problems (Continued)

2 4. Check panel cable for Reconnect following "4.3.3
proper connection at connectors. Replacing
operation panel unit • Main board: J5 Main Board
assembly side and • Operation panel unit Assembly"
main board assembly assembly p.4-21
side.
• Is the panel cable
inserted obliquely?
• Is the connector
securely locked?
5. Panel cable may be Replace panel cable. "4.2.2
damaged. Removing
Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
6. Is operation panel Replace panel board "4.2.2
unit assembly LCD assembly. Removing
damaged? Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
7. Main board assembly Replace main board "4.3.3
may be damaged. assembly. Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
3 Initial ink charge not 1. Is "Sen: Cover open" • Check connection of "4.8.3
available displayed on LCD cover sensor assembly Replacing
with front cover connector. Cover Sensor
closed? • Replace cover sensor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-70
9-35

3 2. Check panel cable for Reconnect following "4.3.3
proper connection at connectors. Replacing
operation panel unit • Main board Main Board
assembly side and assembly: J5 Assembly"
main board assembly • Operation panel unit p.4-21
side. assembly
• Is the panel cable
inserted obliquely?
• Is the connector
securely locked?
3. Is "Sen: Lever up" Adjust lever sensor. "4.5.4
displayed on LCD Replacing T
with media set lever Fence" p.4-
lowered? 41
4. Check main board • Reconnect the "4.3.3
assembly connectors connector. Replacing
J30 for proper • Replace lever sensor Main Board
connection. assembly. Assembly"
p.4-21
5. Are the following • Follow the steps for the "4.3.3
self-diagnosis message "[KCMY] No Replacing
functions judged as Cartridge". Main Board
normal when • After adjustment/ Assembly"
checked with replacement, execute p.4-21
specified cartridge initial ink charge from "(1) Head
securely inserted? "Adj: Input Rank" of Rank" p.5-52
• Detection of self-diagnosis function.
presence of ink from
"Sen: Ink NOT"
• Detection of
presence of cartridge
from "Ink Not"
6. Is specified cartridge • Follow the steps for the "4.3.3
status judged as message "Insert Replacing
normal when specified cartridge". Main Board
checked through "Ink • After adjustment/ Assembly"
Not" of self- replacement, execute p.4-21
diagnosis function initial ink charge from "(1) Head
with specified "Adj: Input Rank" of Rank" p.5-52
cartridge securely self-diagnosis function.
inserted?
9-36

3 7. Main board assembly • Replace main board "4.3.3
• After replacement, Main Board
execute initial ink Assembly"
charge from "Adj: p.4-21
Input Rank" of self-
diagnosis function.
4 Though initial charge Is spring of ink system • If the part is detached, "4.7.2
has started, ink does assembly detached or remount it. Replacing
not reach head. damaged? • If the part is damaged, Pump Cap
replace ink system Assembly"
assembly. p.4-61
5 Though ink reaches Is capping position • If ink inflow is Operation

head, ink is not appropriate? confirmed, execute Manual
discharged from head. initial ink charge.
6 Ink is not discharged 1. Are damper • Remove head cover "4.2.1
though ink charge is assembly, ink tube and check damper Removing R
finished. and SUS pipe joint assembly. Side Cover"
screws (K, Y, M, C) • Remove side cover (L, R) p.4-7
securely tightened? and cartridge cover, and "4.2.3
Is O-ring properly check ink tube and SUS Removing L
installed? pipe joint screws. Side Cover"
p.4-10
"4.2.4
Removing
Ink Holder (I/
H) Cover"
p.4-11
2. Does shield part of • Replace damper "4.6.1
damper assembly assembly and check if Replacing
have air leak? cleaning operation Print Head"
causes ink inflow. p.4-48
• If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
3. Is ink tube in ink • Replace ink system "4.7.2
system assembly assembly and check if Replacing
bent? cleaning operation Pump Cap
causes ink inflow. Assembly"
• If ink inflow is p.4-61
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
9-37

6 4. Does pump motor • Reconnect main board "4.3.3
rotate during assembly connector Replacing
cleaning operation? J22, J23. Main Board
• Replace pump motor. Assembly"
p.4-21
• Replace main board "4.7.1
assembly. Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-57
5. When cleaning Replace maintenance base "4.7.1
operation is assembly. Removing
performed, are gears Maintenance
damaged or poorly Base
engaged? Assembly"
p.4-57
performed, is Maintenance
transmission gear Base
shaft damaged? Assembly"
p.4-57
7. Does ink tube have • Replace damaged ink "4.10.2
bend, scratch, or tube and check if Replacing
leak? cleaning operation Ink Tube"
causes ink inflow after p.4-76
each replacement.
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
8. Check connection of Reconnect head cable. "4.6.1
head cable Replacing
connectors on CR Print Head"
board assembly side p.4-48
and head side. "4.10.1
• Is head cable inserted Replacing
obliquely? CR Board
Assembly"
• Is it locked securely? p.4-75
9-38

6 9. Is head cable Replace head cable. "4.6.1
broken? Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-48
"4.10.1
Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-75
10. Is print head Replace print head "4.6.1
assembly damaged? assembly. Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-48
11. Is CR board Replace CR board "4.10.1
assembly damaged? assembly. Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-75
12. Check connection of Reconnect following "4.10.1
CR cable connectors connectors. Replacing
on CR board • CR board assembly CR Board
assembly side and connector: J201 - J205 Assembly"
main board assembly • Main board assembly p.4-75
side. connector: J9 - J11 "4.3.3
• Is head cable inserted Replacing
obliquely? Main Board
Assembly"
13. Is CR cable broken? Replace CR cable. "4.10.3
Replacing
CR Tape
Wire" p.4-79
may be defective. assembly. Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-39

7 Machine makes no 1. Is "Sen: Cover open" • Check main board "4.3.3
operations after displayed on LCD assembly connector Replacing
turned ON. with printer cover J38, J40. Main Board
closed? • Replace cover sensor Assembly"
Or, is cover sensor assembly. p.4-21
assembly function "4.8.3
detected as normal Replacing
when checked Cover Sensor
through "Test: Assembly"
Sensor" of self- p.4-70
diagnosis function?
8 After turned ON, 2. Check panel cable Reconnect following "4.3.3
machine displays connectors at connectors. Replacing
"Initializing" and operation panel unit • Main board Main Board
resets itself. assembly and main assembly: J5 Assembly"
board assembly. • Operation panel unit p.4-21
• Is panel cable assembly: J1
inserted obliquely?
• Is it locked securely?
9 Machine does not 3. Is "Set Paper" • Check main board "4.3.3
perform initialization displayed on LCD assembly connector Replacing
even if media is set. with pressure arm J30. Main Board
lowered? • Replace lever sensor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-21
"4.5.3
Replacing
Lever
Sensor" p.4-
40
10 Machine does not 4. Is P_REAR sensor • Check main board "4.3.3
start operation even if assembly judged as assembly connector Replacing
front cover is closed. normal when J42. Main Board
checked through • Replace P_REAR Assembly"
"Test: Sensor" of sensor Assembly. p.4-21
self-diagnosis "4.9.2
function? Replacing
P_REAR
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-74
9-40

11 Machine does not stop 5. Check power supply Replace power board "4.3.6
even if front cover is voltage (DC5V). assembly. Replacing
opened. Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-27
DC42V). Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-27
7. Is DC cable assembly • Reconnect DC cable "4.3.6
connected correctly assembly. Replacing
between power board • Replace DC cable Power Board
assembly and main assembly. Assembly"
board assembly? p.4-27
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
12 Ink cartridge cannot 1. Are the following • Follow the steps for the "(1) Head
be detected even if self-diagnosis message "[KCMY] No Rank" p.5-52
installed. functions detected as Cartridge".
normal when • After adjustment/
checked with replacement, execute
specified cartridge initial ink charge from
securely inserted? "Adj: Input Rank" of
• Detection of self-diagnosis function.
presence of ink from
"Sen: Ink NOT "
• Detection of
presence of cartridge
from "Ink Not"
2. Is specified cartridge • Follow the steps for the "(1) Head
status detected as message "Insert Rank" p.5-52
normal when specified cartridge".
checked through "Ink • After adjustment/
Not" of self- replacement, execute
diagnosis function initial ink charge from
with specified "Adj: Input Rank" of
cartridge securely self-diagnosis function.
inserted?
9-41

13 Operation panel 1. Is operation panel Replace operation panel -
accepts no inputs. cover broken or cover.
contaminated?
2. Check panel cable Reconnect following "4.3.3
connectors at connectors. Replacing
operation panel unit • Main board Main Board
assembly side and assembly: J5 Assembly"
main board assembly • Operation panel unit p.4-21
side. assembly: J1
• Is panel cable
inserted obliquely?
• Is it locked securely?
3. Operation panel unit Replace panel unit "4.2.2
assembly may be assembly. Removing
damaged. Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
may be assembly. Replacing
malfunctioning. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
14 Machine prints 1. Refer to "9.3.6 - "9.3.5
nothing though it Online Function Online
receives data. Problem". Function
Problems"
p.9-66
9-42
9.3.2 Media Feed Problems
Table 9-10 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Media Feed Problems

1 Media comes off 1. Are P_REAR sensor • Check following "4.3.3
during media set assembly and connectors. Replacing
initialization or P_EDGE sensor • Main board Main Board
printing. assembly detected as assembly: J42, J9 - Assembly"
normal when J11 p.4-21
checked through "4.10.1
"Test: Sensor" of • CR board assembly: Replacing
self-diagnosis J208, J201 - J203 CR Board
function? • Replace P_REAR Assembly"
sensor assembly and p.4-75
P_EDGE sensor "4.9.2
assembly. Replacing
P_REAR
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-74
"4.6.2
Replacing
Cutter
Holder
Assembly"
p.4-52
2 Media runs obliquely 1. Is suction fan run as • Check connection of "4.9.1
or meanders during normal when following main board Replacing
media set checked through assembly connectors. Suction Fan
initialization or "Test: Fan" of self- • Suction fan cable Assembly"
printing. diagnosis function? assembly: J25 - J29 p.4-73
assembly.
• Replace cable of
suction fan that does
not operate normally.
3 Media crinkles during 1. Is shielding material Remount it at specified "4.9.1
media set secured at specified position. Replacing
initialization or position? Suction Fan
printing. Assembly"
p.4-73
4 Media jams during 1. When pressure lever Lubricate pressure cam. "8.4
media set is moved backward Lubrication/
initialization or and forward, does Bonding"
printing. pressure assembly p.8-6
move smoothly in
synchronization with
it?
9-43
Table 9-10 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Media Feed Problems (Continued)

5 Media is torn during 1. Does pressure roller If pressure roller collects Operation
media set drag when pressure media dust on itself, wipe Manual
initialization or lever is raised? dust away using a wet soft
printing. cloth.
2. Does media guide • If media guide collects
have large distortion media dust or other
or foreign objects? foreign objects on it, "4.2.8
remove them. Removing
• Replace media guide. Media Guide
R2" p.4-15
3. When using roll Insert flanges correctly into Operation
media, are flanges core pipe of media roll. Manual
attached correctly?
6 Machine registers 1. Is media in use a Set recommended media Operation
wrong media size recommended one? and check printout again. Manual
after media set With non-authorized
initialization. media, media sensor may
fail to detect media
correctly.
9-44
9.3.3 Printing Problems

Table 9-11 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Printing Problems
1 Machine cannot print 1. printer driver may be Update printer driver. "7.3.5
sequentially. defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-13
2. Program ROM may be Update firmware. "7.3.5
defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-13
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
2 Media feed after 1. Is P_REAR sensor • Reconnect main board "4.3.3
printing is excessive. assembly judged as assembly connector J42. Replacing
normal when checked • Replace P_REAR sensor Main Board
through "Test: Sensor" assembly. Assembly"
of self-diagnosis p.4-21
function? "4.9.2
Replacing
P_REAR
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-74
defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-13
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-45
Table 9-11 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Printing Problems (Continued)
3 Missing dots in 1. Perform cleaning Operation
printing. twice consecutively. Manual
2. Is ink tube filled with Perform drop ink charge. Operation
ink? Manual
3. Perform "Print: Nozzle If the nozzle check patterns "5.7.8 Test
Check" of printer self- are printed correctly, refer to Printing
diagnosis or "Test the action in check item No. Menu" p.5-41
Print". 4.
4. Does pump motor • Reconnect main board "4.3.3
rotate during cleaning assembly connector J22, Replacing
operation? J23. Main Board
• Replace Pump motor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-21
"4.7.1
• Replace main board Removing
assembly. Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-57
5. Are gears and Replace maintenance base "4.7.1

transmission gear shaft assembly. Removing
damaged or poorly Maintenance
engaged during Base
cleaning operation? Assembly"
p.4-57
4 Nozzle plugging or ink 1. Is spring of ink system • If the part is detached,
splash is not eliminated assembly detached or remount it.
even after cleaning. damaged? • If the part is damaged, "4.7.2
replace ink system Replacing
assembly. Pump Cap
Assembly"
p.4-61
2. Check cleaning wiper • Wipe cleaning wiper Operation
condition. surface with accessory Manual
polynit wiper. After
wiping cleaning wiper,
perform cleaning twice
consecutively.
• If cleaning wiper is
sticky with ink, replace it "4.7.3
with a new one. Replacing
Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-63
9-46
4 Nozzle plugging or ink 3. Is nozzle face wiped/ Check wiper installation "4.7.3
splash is not eliminated rubbed correctly? condition and secure it Replacing
even after cleaning. correctly. Cleaner Head
(Continued) (Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-63
4. Is registered head rank Enter correct head rank. "(1) Head
different from actual Rank" p.5-52
head rank?
5. Does residual ink Clean head as follows. "5.7.9
collect on print head 1. Clean head from "Adj: HeadWash
assembly or in Clean Head" of printer Menu" p.5-42
nozzles? self-diagnosis.
2. Perform initial ink "(1) Head
charge from "Adj: Input Rank" p.5-52
Rank".
3. Check printouts again.
6. Check if CR_ENC • If they contact with each
assembly and other, adjust CR_ENC
T fence contact with assembly and T fence
each other. positions.
• If problem remains even "4.10.1
after position Replacing CR
adjustment, replace CR Board
board assembly and T Assembly"
fence. p.4-75
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-41
system assembly bent? assembly and check if Replacing
cleaning operation Pump Cap
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
8. Is print head damaged? Replace damaged print head. "4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-48
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-47
5 No printing. 1. Check power supply Replace power board "4.3.6
voltage (DC24, assembly. Replacing
Particular color is DC42V). Power Board
missing. Assembly"
p.4-27
2. Is spring of ink system • If the part is detached, "4.7.2
assembly detached or remount it. Replacing
damaged? • If the part is damaged, Pump Cap
assembly. p.4-61
3. Is CR cable inserted Reconnect main board "4.3.3
obliquely? assembly connectors J9 - J11 Replacing
and CR board assembly Main Board
connectors J201 - J205. Assembly"
p.4-21
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-75
4. CR cable may be Replace CR cable assembly. "4.10.3
damaged. Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-79
5. Are damper assembly, • Remove head cover and
ink tube and SUS pipe check damper assembly.
joint screws (K, C, M, • Remove side cover (L, "4.2.1
Y) securely tightened? R) and I/H cover, and Removing R
Is O-ring properly check ink tube and SUS Side Cover"
installed? pipe joint screws. p.4-7
"4.2.3
Removing L
Side Cover"
p.4-10
6. Does shield part of • Replace damper
damper have air leak? assembly and check if
cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
9-48
5 8. Does ink tube have • Replace damaged ink "4.10.2
bend, scratch, or leak? tube and check if Replacing Ink
cleaning operation Tube" p.4-76
causes ink inflow after
each replacement.
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
9. Are the following self- • Follow the steps for the "(1) Head
diagnosis functions message "[KCMY] No Rank" p.5-52
detected as normal Cartridge".
when checked with • After adjustment/
specified cartridge replacement, execute
securely inserted? initial ink charge from
• Detection of presence "Adj: Input Rank" of
of ink from "Sen: Ink self-diagnosis function.
NOT"
• Detection of presence
of cartridge from ""Ink
Not"
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
11. Does pump motor • Reconnect main board "4.3.3
rotate during cleaning assembly connector J22, Replacing
operation? J23. Main Board
• Replace Pump motor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-21
"4.7.1
• Replace main board Removing
assembly. Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-57
performed, does Maintenance
rotate properly? Assembly"
p.4-57
9-49
5 13. When cleaning Replace maintenance base "4.7.1
performed, is Maintenance
transmission gear shaft Base
damaged? Assembly"
p.4-57
14. Check head cable Reconnect head cable. "4.6.1
connectors at CR Replacing
board assembly side Print Head"
and print head p.4-48
assembly side. "4.10.1
• Is head cable inserted Replacing CR
obliquely? Board
Assembly"
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-48
16. CR board assembly Replace CR board assembly. "4.10.1
may be defective. Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-75
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-50
6 Machine outputs all 1. Check connection of Reconnect head cable. "4.6.1
black printing. head cable connectors Replacing
on CR board assembly Print Head"
side and print head p.4-48
side. "4.10.1
• Is head cable inserted Replacing CR
obliquely? Board
Assembly"
2. Is CR cable inserted Reconnect main board "4.3.3
obliquely? assembly connectors J9 - J11 Replacing
and CR board assembly Main Board
connectors J201 - J205. Assembly"
p.4-21
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-75
3. CR cable assembly Replace CR cable assembly. "4.10.3
may be damaged. Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-79
4. Is print head damaged? Replace damaged print head "4.6.1
assembly. Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-48
may be Replacing CR
malfunctioning. Board
Assembly"
p.4-75
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
7 Blocky printing 1. Is working Use machine under specified "3.5
quality. environment environment. Choosing a
8 Blocky image printing. appropriate? Place for the
9 CR line seems dotted. Printer" p.3-6
10 White or black lines
appear. (No missing or
ink crooking in step
patters in location 1G -
7G in "Test Print")
9-51
7 2. Have you started Printing just after initial Operation
8 printing immediately charge may cause following Manual
9 after initial charge? symptoms.
10 • Printed line blurs.
• White lines appear.
In such cases, perform
cleaning two or three times
and check printout again.
If symptoms remain even
after cleaning, leave machine
unused for 1 hour or more.
Then perform cleaning again
and check printout.
If symptoms still remains,
refer to Operation Manual to
contact the technical support.
3. Is suction fan run as • Check connection of "4.9.1
normal when checked following main board Replacing
through "Test: Fan" of assembly connectors. Suction Fan
self-diagnosis • Suction fan 1 - 4 Assembly"
function? assembly: J25 - 29 p.4-73
• Suction fan 2 cable:
J127
• Suction fan L cable:
J126
assembly.
• Replace cable of suction
fan that does not operate
normally.
9-52
8 4. Is shielding material Remount it at specified "4.9.1
9 secured at specified position. Replacing
10 position? Suction Fan
11 Assembly"
p.4-73
5. If the media in Adjust roll receiver assembly "4.2.9
problem is roll media, position. Replace roll Removing
does scroller rotate receiver assembly. Scroller
evenly? Receiver (L,
R)" p.4-15
6. Is PF belt tension Adjust PF reduction belt "(2)
adjusted to tension. Confirming
specification? Completion of
Installation to
Printer" p.7-
15
polynit wiper. After
wiping cleaning wiper,
perform cleaning twice
consecutively.
• If cleaning wiper is
sticky with ink, replace it
with a new one.
8. Is nozzle face wiped/ Check wiper installation "4.7.3
rubbed correctly? condition and secure it Replacing
correctly. Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-63
9. Is T fence • Clean T fence.
contaminated? • If T fence is still
contaminated or "4.5.4
damaged, replace T Replacing T
fence. Fence" p.4-41
10. Does pressure roller If pressure roller collects Operation

rotate harder when media dust on itself, wipe Manual
pressure arm is raised? dust away using a wet soft
cloth.
9-53
9 rotate during cleaning assembly connector J22, Replacing
10 operation? J23. Main Board
11 • Replace pump motor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-21
"4.7.1
Removing
• Replace main board Maintenance
assembly. Base
Assembly"
p.4-57
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
performed, does Maintenance
rotate properly? Assembly"
p.4-57
and transmission gear Base
p.4-57
assembly. p.4-61
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
16. Is registered head Enter correct head voltage. "(1) Head
voltage different from Rank" p.5-52
actual head voltage?
9-54
8 17. Does residual ink Clean head as follows.
9 collect on head 1. Clean head through
10 assembly or in "Adj: Clean Head" of "5.7.9
11 nozzles? self-diagnosis function. HeadWash
2. Perform initial charge Menu" p.5-42
through "Adjustment:
Voltage input".
3. Check plotouts again. "(1) Head
Rank" p.5-52
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-48
19. Are the following self- • Follow the steps for the "(1) Head
diagnosis functions message "[KCMY] No Rank" p.5-52
judged as normal when Cartridge".
checked with specified • After adjustment/
cartridge securely replacement, execute
inserted? initial ink charge from
- Detection of presence "Adj: Input Rank" of
of ink from "Sen: Ink self-diagnosis function.
NOT"
- Detection of presence
of cartridge from ""Ink
Not"
may be Replacing CR
Assembly"
p.4-75
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-55
11 Printout borders blur. 1. Does purge correct Perform purge twice Operation
symptom? consecutively. Manual
2. Is media in use a Set recommended media and Operation
recommended one? check printout again. With Manual
non-authorized media, media
sensor may fail to detect
media correctly.
3. CR cable assembly Replace CR cable assembly "4.10.3
may be damaged. wire. Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-79
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-48
may be Replacing CR
Assembly"
p.4-75
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
12 Many satellites 1. Is working Use machine under specified "3.5
(unnecessary dots) environment environment. Choosing a
appropriate? Place for the
13 Shaggy plotout Printer" p.3-6
2. Is the ink level Replace ink cartridge with Operation
14 Uneven lines (plotted
remained sufficient? new one. Manual
with stains)
3. Perform purge three Plot out drawing again. Operation
times consecutively. Manual
4. Perform test printing. If nozzle check patterns are
plotted correctly, refer to step
(6)
5. Have you started Be sure to wait 6 hours or Operation
plottout immediately more after initial ink charge. Manual
after initial charge? Plotout before ink charge
stabilization will not provide
adequate plottting quality.
6. Is CR belt tension Adjust CR belt tension. "7.6 CR
adjusted to Belt Tension
specification? Adjustment"
p.7-24
9-56
12 7. Check if PF_ENC • If they contact with each
13 assembly and T fence other, adjust CR_ENC
14 contact with each assembly and T fence
other. positions.
• If problem remains even "4.10.1
after position Replacing CR
adjustment, replace CR Board
board assembly and T Assembly"
fence. p.4-75
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-41
cleaning wiper cleaning
cloth dampened with
small amount of purified
water. After wiping
cleaning wiper, perform
cleaning twice
consecutively. "4.7.3
• If cleaning wiper is Replacing
sticky with ink, replace it Cleaner Head
with a new one. (Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-63
9. Is nozzle face wiped/ Check wiper installation "4.7.3
rubbed correctly? condition and secure it Replacing
correctly. Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-63
9-57
13 rotate during cleaning assembly connector J102 Replacing
14 operation? 　and J103. Main Board
• Replace pump motor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-21
• Replace main board "4.7.1
assembly. Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-57
and transmission gear Base
p.4-57
assembly. p.4-61

confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
15. Does residual ink Clean head as follows.
collect on print head 1) Clean head from "Adj: "5.7.9
assembly or in Clean Head" of printer HeadWash
nozzles? self-diagnosis. Menu" p.5-42
2) Perform initial ink
charge from "Adj: Input "5.7.4
Rank". Voltage
3) Check printouts again. Adjustment"
p.5-30
16. Is print head assembly Replace damaged print head "4.6.1
damaged? assembly. Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-48
9-58
12 17. Main board assembly Replace main board "4.3.3
13 may be damaged. assembly. Replacing
14 Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
15 Mixed color lines are 1. Is CR belt tension Adjust CR belt tension. "7.6 CR
not overlaid. adjusted to Belt Tension
p.7-24
3. Is head slant Adjust head slant. "7.6 CR
inappropriate? Belt Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-24
4. Are Bi-Directional Align Bi-Directional printing "5.7.5 Uni-
printing positions positions. D / Bi-D Low
aligned correctly? Adjustment"
p.5-32
5. Is CW adjustment Perform CW adjustment. "5.7.5 Uni-
inappropriate? D / Bi-D Low
Adjustment"
p.5-32
16 Black and other colors 1. Check if CR_ENC • If they contact with each
do not align. assembly and T fence other, adjust CR_ENC
contact with each assembly and T fence
other. positions. "4.10.1
• If problem remains even Replacing CR
after position Board
adjustment, replace CR Assembly"
board assembly and T p.4-75
fence. "4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-41
9-59
17 Poor accuracy of 1. Is working Use machine under specified "3.5
segment length in head environment environment. Choosing a
travel direction (main appropriate? Place for the
scan direction). Printer" p.3-6
p.7-24
3. Is T fence • Clean T fence.
contaminated? • If T fence is still "4.5.4
contaminated or Replacing T
damaged, replace T Fence" p.4-41
fence.
4. Internal process of Initialize parameters and "5.11.1
main board assembly reenter or modify them. Parameter
may be abnormal. Then, check machine Initialization
operation again. Menu" p.5-49
18 Poor linearity in head 1. Is suction fan run as • Check connection of "4.9.1
scan direction normal when checked following main board Replacing
(straightness) through "Test: Fan" of assembly connectors. Suction Fan
self-diagnosis • Suction 1 - 4 cable: Assembly"
function? J25 - J29 p.4-73
assembly.
normally.
2. Is PF driving pulley Replace PF motor assembly. "4.4.1
loose? Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-31
3. Is PF speed reduction Adjust PF speed reduction "(2)
belt tension adjusted to belt tension. Confirming
Installation to
Printer" p.7-
15
9-60
18 4. If the media in • Adjust roll receiver "4.2.9
problem is roll media, assembly position. Removing
does scroller rotate • Replace roll receiver Scroller
evenly? assembly. Receiver (L,
R)" p.4-15
cloth.
19 Poor accuracy of 1. Is working Use machine under specified "3.5
segment length in environment environment. Choosing a
media feed direction appropriate? Place for the
(sub scan direction) Printer" p.3-6
2. Is PF driving pulley Replace PF motor assembly. "4.4.1
loose Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-31
3. Is PF belt tension Adjust PF speed reduction "(2)
adjusted to belt tension. Confirming
Installation to
Printer" p.7-
15
cloth.
5. Is rough surface of grid If grid roller is contaminated Operation
roller partially worn with media dust, clean roller Manual
out? with a nylon brush.
6. Is grid roller rotation
heavy? Does rattling
occur when it rotates?
7. If the media in Adjust roll receiver assembly "4.2.9
problem is roll media, position. Removing
does scroller rotate Replace roll receiver Scroller
evenly? assembly. Receiver (L,
Change media to be used. R)" p.4-15
9-61
20 Poor linearity in media 1. Is registered head Enter correct head voltage. "(1) Head
feed direction (media voltage different from Rank" p.5-52
splicing accuracy) actual head voltage?
2. Adjust head slant. Adjust head slant. "7.6 CR
Belt Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-24
p.7-24
4. Are Bi-Directional Align two-way printing "5.7.5 Uni-
printing positions positions. D / Bi-D Low
aligned correctly? Adjustment"
p.5-32
5. Is T fence Clean T fence. "4.5.4
contaminated? If T fence is still Replacing T
contaminated or damaged, Fence" p.4-41
replace T fence.
6. Check if vertical lines Replace steel bearer "4.10.3
plotted from "Adj: assembly. Replacing CR
Black Slant" are not Tape Wire"
connected even though p.4-79
nozzle check pattern
from "Adj: Chk
Nozzle" of self-
diagnosis function is
adjusted properly.
7. Is carriage assembly Replace carriage assembly. -
loose?
21 Poor right angle 1. Is suction fan judged • Check connection of "4.9.1
accuracy as normal when following maintenance Replacing
checked through "Test: board assembly Suction Fan
Fan" of self-diagnosis connectors. Assembly"
function? • Suction fan 1 - 4 p.4-73
assembly: J25 - J29
assembly.
normally.
22 2. Does pressure roller If pressure roller collects Operation
cloth.
9-62
3. Is rough surface of grid If grid roller is contaminated Operation
roller partially worn with media dust, clean roller Manual
out? with a nylon brush.
9.3.4 Noise Problems

Table 9-12 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems
1 Abnormal noise is 1. Are there any foreign Remove obstacles and "4.9.1
heard when media is objects or obstacles foreign objects. Replacing
suctioned. around rotating fin of Suction Fan
suction fan assembly? Assembly"
p.4-73
2. Check damage of If damaged, replace damaged -
cables and connection part.
of connectors.
3. Suction fan assembly Replace suction fan "4.9.1
Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-73
malfunctioning. Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-73
5. Power board assembly Replace power board "4.3.6
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-27
9-63
Table 9-12 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems (Continued)
2 Abnormal noise in 1. Are there any foreign Remove obstacles and -
waiting mode objects or obstacles at foreign objects.
noise-generating
position?
2. Is abnormal noise Replace applicable one of the "4.3.6
heard from board? following board assemblies. Replacing
• Power board assembly Power Board
• Main board assembly Assembly"
p.4-27
• CR board assembly "4.3.3
• Print head assembly Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-48
3 Abnormal noise is 1. Does customer Explain machine operations. -
heard while head is recognize ink
moving laterally. discharge noise as
abnormal noise?
2. Is abnormal noise Additionally tighten screws. "4.2
caused by loose screw Removal of
in covers? Covers" p.4-6
3. Is rattling noise heard • Remove dust from -
when moving carriage carriage bearing and
laterally? roller strip.
• After cleaning roller
strip, always apply thin
lubricant film over its
surface using a grease-
sprayed cloth.
4. Is abnormal noise • Remove twists from CR "4.10.3
heard from CR cable? cable. Replacing CR
• If abnormal noise sounds Tape Wire"
from between steel p.4-79
bearer and tube guide,
replace tube guide.
9-64
Table 9-12 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems (Continued)
3 5. Does the cable • If they contact with each "4.10.3
connected to CR board other, adjust TF_ENC Replacing CR
assembly on carriage assembly and T fence Tape Wire"
contact with CR positions. p.4-79
cover? • If problem remains even
after position
adjustment, replace
TF_ENC assembly and
T fence.
6. Is abnormal noise Replace it. "4.5.5
heard from CR driven Replacing CR
pulley bearing? Driven Pulley"
p.4-44
p.7-24
8. Is abnormal noise Replace CR motor assembly. "4.5.1 CR
heard from CR motor Motor
assembly? Assembly"
p.4-38
4 Abnormal noise is 1. Is PF speed reduction Replace PF speed reduction "4.4.1
heard during media belt slipping between belt. Replacing PF
feeding. PF speed reduction Motor
pulleys? Assembly"
p.4-31
2. Is abnormal noise Replace PF motor assembly. "4.4.1
heard from PF motor Replacing PF
assembly? Motor
Assembly"
p.4-31
3. Is rough surface of If grid roller is contaminated Operation
grid roller partially with media dust, clean roller Manual
worn out? with a nylon brush.
9-65
9.3.5 Online Function Problems

Table 9-13 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Online Function Problems
No. Event/symptom Check item Action Reference
1 USB interface cannot 1. Does computer in use Windows95 does not support -
establish communication. support USB? USB officially. If you use
Windows95, use computer
with Windows98 or higher
OS installed.
2. Does the same error Use another USB port on the -
occur even if you use computer.
another USB port on
the computer?
3. Are you using USB • Cascade connection -
hub? using USB hub is
available up to 5 stages.
• If the printer operates
normally without using
USB hub, replace USB
hub.
• Instruct users to use USB
hubs compliant with
USB2.0 Hi-Speed
standard.
4. Attempt Replace USB cable. -
communication with
PC on hand.
5. Does the same error Communication error may -
occur even if interface be caused by an open circuit
cable is changed? in interface cable or too long
cable length. Instruct users to
use cables compliant with
USB2.0 Hi-Speed standard.
6. Printer driver may be Update printer driver. -
defective.
defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-13
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
2 Scaling does not work 1. Printer driver may be Update printer driver. Operation
correctly. defective. Manual
9-66
Table 9-13 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Online Function Problems(Continued)
3 Mirror function does 2. Program ROM may be Update firmware. "7.3.5
not work correctly. defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-13
4 Other functions do not 3. Main board assembly Replace main board "4.3.3
work correctly. may be damaged. assembly. Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
5 Printing position is 1. Is CW adjustment Perform adjustment. "5.7.5 Uni-
incorrect. inappropriate? D / Bi-D Low
Adjustment"
p.5-32
2. Is adjustment of top/ Perform adjustment. "7.11.2
bottom margin P_REAR
distance inappropriate Sensor
between front sensor Adjustment"
and head and between p.7-35
cutter and head?
3. Printer driver may be Update printer driver. Operation
defective. Manual
defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-13
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-67
6 Some data are not 1. Printer driver may be Update printer driver. Operation
printed (missing). defective. Manual
Some data change to 2. Program ROM may be Update firmware. "7.3.5

garbage. defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-13
3. Is T fence • If grease or dust collect:
contaminated or worn Wipe fence with a dry
out? cloth.
• If ink deposit presents:
Wipe it off with cloth
dampened with neutral
detergent.
• If contamination or "4.5.4
deposit is too heavy: Replacing T
Replace T fence. Fence" p.4-41
4. Check "CR Encoder" • Move carriage in both "4.3.3
from "Test: Encoder" directions and check the Replacing
of self-diagnosis numeral value on LCD. Main Board
function. If the numeral value Assembly"
doesn't change normaly, p.4-21
check main board
assembly connector J12. "4.5.4
• Replace T fence. Replacing T
Fence" p.4-41
• Replace TF_ENC
assembly.
"4.5.1 CR
• Replace CR motor Motor
assembly. Assembly"
p.4-38
"4.10.1
• Replace CR board Replacing CR
assembly. Board
Assembly"
p.4-75
• Replace CR cable. "4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-79
malfunctioning. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-68
7 Media feed after 1. Are print start position Check the media type setting. Operation
printout is excessive. and layout method set Manual
properly?
2. Printer driver setting • Modify the value to an Operation
may be unsuitable. appropriate value (Media Manual
size).
• Update printer driver.
defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-13
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9.3.6 Other Problems

Table 9-14 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions
1 Machine hangs up. 1. Internal process of Initialize parameters and "7.3.1
main board assembly reenter or modify them. Parameter
may be abnormal. Backup" p.7-8
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-21
9-69
Table 9-14 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions (Continued)

2 Machine power is shut 1. Is power cable Check by a circuit tester. -
off during printing. shorted?
2. Is there any electric Check for short to chassis -
leakage? ground due to damaged cable
insulation.
voltage (AC100V). assembly. Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-27
voltage (DC5V). assembly. Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-27
DC42V). Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-27
6. Power board assembly Replace power board "4.3.6
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-27
3 Ink cartridge cannot be 1. Is pointer of ink sensor Replace ink sensor assembly. "4.8.1
inserted. assembly deformed or Replacing Ink
damaged? Holder (I/H)
Assembly"
p.4-66
2. Is ink NOT sensor Replace ink sensor assembly. "4.8.1
(black resin lever Replacing Ink
switch) of ink sensor Holder (I/H)
assembly damaged? Assembly"
p.4-66
9-70

4 Ink spills out of waste 1. Check inside of waste Replace waste ink absorber -
fluid box. fluid box. sheet.
2. Check presence of ink Remove all cartridges and "5.5.4
cartridge from "Ink lightly push the switch of ink Sensor Menu"
Not" of self-diagnosis NOT sensor (BK, C, M, Y) p.5-15
function. with something with a flat tip
such as ballpoint pen to
check that the display of
"Sen: No cartridge" changes.
3. Is waste fluid tube Reinstall it. "4.7.4
coming out of flushing Replacing
box bent? Flushing Box
Assembly"
p.4-64
5 Ink spills out of 1. Is flushing box • Remove dust. "4.7.4
flushing box. clogged with dust? • Replace flushing box Replacing
assembly. Flushing Box
Assembly"
p.4-64
2. Is waste fluid tube Reinstall waste fluid tube. -
coming out of flushing
box bent?
3. Does ink accumulate Replace flushing box "4.7.4
in ink absorber sheet in assembly. Replacing
flushing box? Flushing Box
Assembly"
p.4-64
9-71

6 Ink spills around X rail. 1. Extension tube may be • Remove maintenance "4.7.1
disconnected under ink base assembly and check Removing
system assembly. if extension tube is Maintenance
connected. Base
• Replace pump motor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-57
"4.7.2
• Replace ink system Replacing
assembly. Pump Cap
Assembly"
p.4-61
2. Ink tube may be cut. Replace ink tube. "4.7.2
Replacing
Pump Cap
Assembly"
p.4-61
3. Print head, main board After removing ink cartridge, "4.3.3
assembly and CR check if each board operates Replacing
board assembly may properly. Main Board
be defective. Assembly"
p.4-21
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-48
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-75
9.3.7 Problems in Using Dedicated Network Software

Table 9-15 Problems in Using Dedicated Network Software
1 MUTOH Maintenance - Perform reinstallation and Network
Assistant does not start initial setting. Administration
up. Manual
2 "Transfer failed (Data 1. Are printer and PC Yes: Proceed to (2). "7.3.3
timeout)" is displayed connected correctly No: Connect printer and Required
during transfer. with network cable PC correctly. Environment"
(crossover cable for p.7-9
direct connection and
straight cable for
connection via hub)?
9-72
Table 9-15 Problems in Using Dedicated Network Software (Continued)

2. Is PC IP address Yes: Proceed to (3). "7.3.3
appropriate? No: Adjust TCP/IP Required
properties from Environment"
[Properties] of [Local p.7-9
Area Connection] in
[Network Connections]
setting of PC. PC and
printer must have the same
subnet address (i.e.
192.168.1.1/24 and
192.168.1.253).
3. Is any device of the Yes: Disconnect the -
same IP address as PC applicable device from
or printer connected to network.
hub? No: Proceed to (4).
4. Is printer started in Yes: Proceed to (5). "7.3.3
board manager mode No: Start printer in board Required
and only POWER manager mode. If LCD Environment"
LED turned on? displays nothing, engine p.7-9
component may be
defective or firmware may
not be installed (including
power cutoff due to power
failure during installation
or other causes.)
5. Is printer IP address Yes: Proceed to (6). "4.3.3
appropriate? (Check No: Engine board may by Replacing
address according to defective Main Board
Section 6.3.) Assembly"
p.4-21
2 6. Is LAN Yes: Connect PC with "4.3.3
communication other device with LAN Replacing
between PC and other cable and check with Main Board
device available? method such as ping Assembly"
command. p.4-21
No: PC or engine board
may by defective.
9-73
Table 9-15 Problems in Using Dedicated Network Software (Continued)

3 "Error received: Buffer Firmware size is too large. Printer repeats buzzer "7.3.5
overflow." is displayed Check if transferred operation in short cycles as Firmware
during transfer. firmware is an appropriate well as display of the Installation"
file. message shown below on p.7-13
LCD. All LEDs of ROLL
MEDIA, CUT MEDIA,
COLOR and
MONOCHROME also
flash simultaneously.
Transfer failed
Data format error
To stop the buzzer, press

any key except for the
power key once.
To return to status in
which installation is
available, press any key
except for the power key
once again.
9-74
VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual 10 Appendix
10 Appendix
10.1 Introduction ........................................................................................... 10- 2
10.2 Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 10- 2
10.3 Maintenance Part List........................................................................... 10- 2
10.4 Jigs and Tools....................................................................................... 10- 7
10.4.1 Required Tools............................................................................. 10-7
10.4.2 Required Screws.......................................................................... 10-8
10.5 Exploded View..................................................................................... 10- 10
10-1
10 Appendix VJ-1204 　 Maintenance Manual
10.1 Introduction
This chapter provides referential information such as service data and exploded views.
10.2 Wiring Diagram

For wiring diagram, see information below.
TIP
Separate sheet “Wiring Diagram” p.1
10.3 Maintenance Part List
Table 10-1 Maintenance Part List
Section name Part name Part number Remarks

Carriage Cutter solenoid assembly DF-42234 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
Damper assembly DF-46678
P_EDGE assembly DF-48983 Common with RJ-900 series
CR_ENC assembly DF-48986 Common with RJ-900 series
PG origin sensor terminal DF-49001 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
Solenoid terminal assembly DF-49003 Common with RJ-900 series
Head cable assembly DF-49017 Common with RJ-900 series
Head FG assembly DF-49018 Common with RJ-900 series
Head tube Y1 assembly DF-49036 Common with RJ-900 series
Head tube B assembly DF-49037 Common with RJ-900 series
Solenoid spring assembly DF-49062 Common with RJ-900 series
Roller arm assembly DF-49065 Common with RJ-900 series
Head tube BK assembly DF-49472 Common with RJ-900 series
Head tube C assembly DF-49473 Common with RJ-900 series
Head tube M assembly DF-49474 Common with RJ-900 series
CR board assembly DF-49659 -
Print head assembly DF-49684 -
Carriage assembly DF-49685 -
10-2

Carriage Three-way joint 2-2x2 DF-49688 -
assembly
CR assembly CR motor cable A0 DF-48992 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
CR origin sensor cable DF-49000 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
Lever sensor cable DF-49004 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
CR cable A0 assembly DF49016 Common with RJ-900 series
CR motor assembly DF-49021 Common with RJ-900 series
T fence A0 assembly DF-49025 Common with RJ-900 series
T fence spring assembly DF-49026 Common with RJ-900 series
Fence guide assembly DF-49027 Common with RJ-900 series
Tube guide A0 assembly DF-49040 Common with RJ-900 series
Steel bearer A0 assembly DF-49043 Common with RJ-900 series
CR belt A0 DF-49045 Common with RJ-900 series
CR driven pulley assembly DF-49047 Common with RJ-900 series
CR_HP sensor, lever sensor DF-49471 Common with RJ-900 series
Pressure spring DF-49691 -
Pressure arm assembly DF-49692 Common with RJ-900 series
Pressure roller assembly DF-49693 Common with RJ-900 series
Tube clamp DF-49694 -
CR tube DF-49701 -
Heater junction board DG-40135 -
assembly
CNT to JC cable assembly DG-40136 -
PF assembly PF_ENC A0 assembly DF-48985 Common with RJ-900 series
PF motor cable A0 DF-48990 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
PF motor assembly DF-49020 Common with RJ-900 series
PF_ENC scale assembly DF-49028 Common with RJ-900 series
X speed reduction belt DF-49046 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
10-3

PF assembly Speed reduction pulley DF-49051 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
Frame assembly Suction fan DF-46328 Common with RJ-900 series
Including one set
Suction fan cable 1 DF-48994 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
assembly
assembly
assembly
Lock arm assembly DF-49059 Common with RJ-900 series
Lock arm spring assembly DF-49060 Common with RJ-900 series
Arm shaft assembly DF-49061 Common with RJ-900 series
Media guide Thermistor assembly DF-46639 -
assembly
P_REAR sensor assembly DF-48982 Common with RJ-900 series
Preheater, 100 DF-49695 -
Platen heater, 100 DF-49696 -
PLT_H1 cable assembly DF-49675 -
PLT_H2 cable assembly DF-49676 -
PRE_H cable assembly DF-49677 -
AFT_H cable assembly DF-49678 -
PLT_T1 cable assembly DF-49679 -
PLT_T2 cable assembly DF-49680 -
PRE_T cable assembly DF-49681 -
AFT_T cable assembly DF-49682 -
Cartridge Holder Pressure spring DF-43967 -
assembly
INK ID board assembly DF-43968 -
Frame assembly, hook DF-46700 -
INK cable assembly DG-40138 -
10-4

Maintenance Waste fluid sensor cable DF-48987 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly assembly
Pump motor cable assembly DF-48993 Common with RJ-900 series
Wiper origin cable DF-49002 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
Maintenance assembly DF-49686 -
Cleaner head assembly DF-49687 -
Cap DF-49690 -
Flushing box DF-49697 -
Flushing absorber DF-49698 -
Waste fluid tray sensor E-0S-3205A- -
N2
Cover assembly Panel unit assembly DF-48977 Common with RJ-900 series
Panel sheet DF-49894 -
Cover R sensor assembly DF-49011 Common with RJ-900 series
Cover L sensor A0 DF-49013 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
Panel cable assembly DF-49014 Common with RJ-900 series
Front cover receiver DF-49056 Including one set
assembly Common with RJ-900 series
Sensor cover L assembly DF-49057 Common with RJ-900 series
Sensor cover R assembly DF-49058 Common with RJ-900 series
Scroller receiver roller DF-49063 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
Roll receiver R assembly DF-49066 Common with RJ-900 series
Roll receiver L assembly DF-49067 Common with RJ-900 series
Board assembly AC inlet DF-47293
Power board assembly DF-48975 Common with RJ-900 series
DC cable assembly DF-48980 Common with RJ-900 series
Cooling fan cable A0 DF-48999 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
Noise filter cable A0 DF-49006 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
Noise filter FG assembly DF-49019 Common with RJ-900 series
10-5

Board assembly Cooling fan (24V) DF-49022 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
Cooling fan assembly DF-49023 Common with RJ-900 series
MAIN board assembly DF-49658 -
HEATER CONT board DF-49660 -
assembly
HEATER RELAY board DF-49661 -
assembly
Noise filter to Fuse AC DF-49663 -
cable
Fuse to Terminal Stand AC DF-49664 -
cable
Terminal Stand to MAIN DF-49665 -
AC cable
DC cable assembly DF-49666 -
Terminal Stand to CNT AC DF-49667 -
cable
CNT to RLY AC cable DF-49668 -
assembly
CNT to RLY tape wire DF-49669 -
RLY_AC cable assembly DF-49670 -
MAIN to CNT DC cable DF-49671 -
assembly
MAIN to CNT serial cable DF-49672 -
assembly
CNT to power AC cable DF-49673 -
assembly
CNT to power DC cable DF-49674 -
assembly
Fuse DF-49683 -
MAIN to CNT cable DG-40137 -
assembly
Accessory Caster with a lock assembly DF-49070 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
Free caster assembly DF-49071 Common with RJ-900 series
Book holder assembly DF-49076 Common with RJ-900 series
10-6

Accessory Leg screw set assembly DF-49080 Common with RJ-900 series
assembly
Others O-ring, M6 DF-46671 Common with RJ-900 series
Power cable 15A (U.S.A) DF-48405 -
Operation Manual (English DF-49702 -
version)
Operation Manual DF-49706 -
(Japanese version)
VJ periodical maintenance DG-40075 -
kit
10-7
10.4 Jigs and Tools

This section provides lists of jigs and tools required for service operations.
10.4.1 Required Tools
(1) Tools for Part Replacement

Table 10-2 Tools for Part Replacement
No. Name Part number Remarks
1 Phillips driver No.2 Generic product More than 250mm shaft length is
recommended
2 Phillips driver No.2 Generic product Less than 50mm shaft length is
recommended
3 Phillips driver No.1 Generic product
4 Flat-head driver Generic product
5 Longnose plier Generic product
6 Tweezers Generic product
7 Hex wrench (opposite side: Optional stand Required only when disassembling legs
6mm) accessory (Generic
product)
8 Rubber bush JD-42052 Consumable (To be replaced every 20
times)
9 Mini-fitting JD-42053/Generic Manufacturer: Iuchi Seieidou
product
(2) Tools for Adjustment

Table 10-3 Tools for Adjustment
1 Personal computer Generic product
2 Tension gauge Generic product Max. 10,000gf (100N) for measurement
3 Tension gauge Generic product Max. 5,000gf (50N) for measurement
4 MF-3G Exclusive use media Used for media sensor adjustment
(P_REAR sensor and P_EDGE sensor) and
for print accuracy adjustment
5 Straight scale (1000mm) Generic product
6 Jig cutter holder (VJ) JD-42804
7 PG height check tool (VJ) JD-42806
8 O-ring A0040G JD-42621
10-8
Table 10-3 Tools for Adjustment (Continued)

9 Pan-head machine screw M4 x JD-42623
12 (former JIS)
10-9
10.5 Exploded View

For exploded views and the maintenance parts, see information below.
TIP
Separate sheet “Exploded View” p.2-p.10
10-10
VJ-1204E Maintenance Manual Supplement Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
㪈㪉㪊㪋㪌㪍㪎㪏
PANEL 㪡㪈㪧㪸㫅㪼㫃㩷㫋㪸㫇㪼㩷㫎㫀㫉㪼㪡㪌㩷㪧㪘㪥㪜㪣㪪㪦㩷㪛㪠㪤㪤㩿㪈㪉㪏㪤㪀㪢㪶㪠㪥㪢㪡㪈㪋㩿㪪㫇㪸㫉㪼㩷㪽㫆㫉䇭㪠㫅㫂㩷㪢㪀

For Wiper 㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪻㫉㫀㫍㪼㫉
㪡㪊㪘㪚㪛㪚
PUMPMOTOR 㪡㪉㪉㪧㪬㪤㪧㪈㪘㪊㪐㪌㪌㫊㪣㪙㩷㫏㩷㪉㪚㪶㪠㪥㪢㪡㪈㪌㩿㪪㫇㪸㫉㪼㩷㪽㫆㫉䇭㪠㫅㫂㩷㪚㪀
㪫㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㫆㫉
㪧㫌㫄㫇㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㩷㪥㪂㪌㪭
㪡㪉㪊㪧㪬㪤㪧㪉㪤㪶㪠㪥㪢㪡㪈㪍㪚㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻
㩿㪪㫇㪸㫉㪼㩷㪽㫆㫉䇭㪠㫅㫂㩷㪤㪀
㪡㪋
㪣㪂㪈㪉㪭
Wiper origin sensor 㪡㪉㪎㪮㪠㪧㪜㪶㪦㪩㪞㪰㪶㪠㪥㪢㪡㪈㪎㩿㪪㫇㪸㫉㪼㩷㪽㫆㫉䇭㪠㫅㫂㩷㪰㪀㪘
㪮㫀㫇㪼㫉㩷㫆㫉㫀㪾㫀㫅㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪠㪪㪧㪚㪣㪢㪄㪡㪫㪘㪞
㪘 CR origin sensor
㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㩷
㪡㪉㪋㪩㪜㪭㪶㪠㪥㪢㪈㪡㪈㪏㩿㪪㫇㪸㫉㪼㩷㪽㫆㫉䇭㪠㫅㫂㩷㪈㪀
㪂㪉㪋㪭㪥㫆㫋㩷㪚㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻
㪚㪩㪶㪦㪩㪞㪡㪋㪋
㪚㪩㩷㫆㫉㫀㪾㫀㫅㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷
Lever sensor 㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪡㪊㪇
㪠㪪㪧㩷㪡㪫㪘㪞
㪩㪜㪭㪶㪠㪥㪢㪉㪡㪈㪐
㪂㪋㪉㪭
㪣㪜㪭㪜㪩㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㪜㩿㪪㫇㪸㫉㪼㩷㪽㫆㫉䇭㪠㫅㫂㩷㪉㪀
Lever sensor relay assembly
㪡㪉
㩿㪩㪼㫊㪼㫉㫍㪼㪻㪀㪡㪊㪎㪩㪜㪭㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㪜㪈
㪪㪰㪪㪫㪜㪤㩷㪝㪧㪞㪘㩷㪡㪫㪘㪞
㩿㪩㪼㫊㪼㫉㫍㪼㪻䋩㪡㪊㪐㪩㪜㪭㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㪜㪉㪧㪝㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩㪡㪉㪇㪤㩷㩷㩷㩷㪧㪝㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪧㪝㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪘㪇㩷㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㩷
Main Board 㪧㪝㪶㩷㪜㪥㪚㪡㪈㪉㪧㪝㩷㪼㫅㪺㫆㪻㪼㫉
Waste fluid box sensor R 㪡㪊㪊㪮㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㩷㪩㪧㪝㩷㪼㫅㪺㫆㪻㪼㫉㩷㪘㪇㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐
Waste fluid box sensor
cable assembly 㪚㪩㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩㪡㪉㪈㪤㩷㩷㩷㩷㪚㪩㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪡㪊㪌㪮㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㩷㪣㩿㪩㪜㪭㪀㪡㪋㪈㪚㪩㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪘㪇㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㩷
㪛㪼㪹㫌㪾㩷㪧㪦㪩㪫
㪝㫌㫊㪼㩷㫏㩷㪉 P_PEAR sensor 㪡㪋㪉㪧㪶㪩㪜㪘㪩㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪

P_PEAR sensor assembly 㪚㪩㪶㪜㪥㪚㪦㪛㪜㪩㪡㪉㪇㪎㪚㪩㩷㪼㫅㪺㫆㪻㪼㫉㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㫐
㪥㫆㫀㫊㪼㩷㪽㫀㫃㫋㪼㫉㪄㪝㫌㫊㪼㪡㪎㪚㪩㩷㪼㫅㪺㫆㪻㪼㫉㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪘㪚㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪠㪝㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㪶㪜㪛㪞㪜㪡㪉㪇㪏㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㪶㪜㪛㪞㪜㩷㫊㪼㫄㫊㫆㫋
㪝㫌㫊㪼㩷㪟㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉㪧㪶㪜㪛㪞㪜㪎㪊㪏㪘㫊㫊㫐
㪜㪄㪝㪄㪍㪍㪘㪛㪡㪏
㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪠㪝
㪧㪞㪶㪦㪩㪞㪠㪥㪡㪉㪇㪐㪧㪞㩷㫆㫉㪾㫀㪾㫀㫅㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
Noise filter 㪝㫌㫊㪼㩷㪟㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉㪣㪘㪥㪡㪍㪜㪫㪟㪜㪩㩷㪥㪜㪫
㪜㪄㪝㪄㪍㪍㪙㪛㪧㪞㩷㫆㫉㫀㪾㫀㫅㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪚㪬㪫㪫㪜㪩㪶㪪㪦㪣㪜㪥㪦㪠㪛㩷
㪚㪬㪫㪫㪜㪩㪶
㪬㪪㪙㪡㪈㪊㪪㪦㪣㪜㪥㪦㪠㪛㪡㪉㪇㪍㪚㫌㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㫊㫆㫃㪼㫅㫆㫀㪻㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪬㪪㪙㩷㪠㪝
CR board 㪚㫌㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㫊㫆㫃㪼㫅㫆㫀㪻㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪟㪼㪸㪻㩷㫋㪸㫇㪼㩷㫎㫀㫉㪼㩷㫏㩷㪉㪧㫆㫊㫋㩷㪿㪼㪸㪻㪼㫉㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪙 Noise filter FG cable 㪙
Cover R sensor 㪡㪊㪏㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷㪩
assembly 㪡㪈㪈㪡㪉㪇㪈㪡㪉㪇㪋㪡㪈
㪝㫌㫊㪼㪄㪫㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃㩷㫊㫋㪸㫅㪻㩷㪘㪚㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼 Cover R sensor A0 assembly 㪟㪜㪘㪛
㪝㪞㪠㪛㪋㪎㪭
Cover L sensor 㪡㪋㪇㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷㪣㪡㪈㪇㪡㪉㪇㪉㪡㪉㪇㪌㪡㪉
Cover L sensor A0 assembly
㪡㪐㪡㪉㪇㪊
㪝㪘㪥㪈㪡㪉㪈㪇㪟㪼㪸㪻㩷㪝㪞㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼
Cooling fan (5V) 㪡㪊㪉㪚㪦㪦㪣㪠㪥㪞㪝㪘㪥㪈
assembly 㪚㪩㩷㫋㪸㫇㪼㩷㫎㫀㫉㪼㩷㪘㪇㩷㫏㩷㪊
㪫㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃㩷㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻 Spare for Cooling fan (5V) 㪡㪊㪋㪚㪦㪦㪣㪠㪥㪞㪝㪘㪥㪉㪝㪘㪥㪉㪡㪉㪈㪈㪠㪥㪢㩷㪠㪛㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐㪪㪤㪘㪩㪫
㪚㪟㪠㪧
㪝㪞
Cooling fan (24V)
assembly 㪡㪊㪍㪚㪦㪦㪣㪠㪥㪞㪝㪘㪥㪊㪡㪉㪌 BLOWER FAN1
㩷㩷㩷㪪㪿㫆㫉㫋㩷㪹㪸㫉㪪㫌㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪽㪸㫅㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪈㩷㪠㪥㪢㪠㪛
㪧㫆㫊㫋㩷㪿㪼㪸㪻㪼㫉
㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪚㫆㫆㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㪽㪸㫅㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪘㪇㩷
㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪡㪉㪍
Heater Junction
㪠㫅㫂㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼
㪘㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㩿㪭㪡㪈㪉㪀㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
㪢
㪪㫌㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪽㪸㫅㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪉㩷
BLOWER FAN2
㪛㪚㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪡㪉㪏
BLOWER FAN3
board 㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪣㪦㪫㪈㪡㪌㪠㪥㪢
㪪㫌㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪽㪸㫅㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪊㩷
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪹㫆㪸㫉㪻㩷
㪚㪥㪇㪇㪈㪚㪥㪊㪇㪈㪡㪈㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪠㪥㪢㩷㪠㪛㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐㪪㪤㪘㪩㪫
㩷㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪡㪉㪐
㪪㫌㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪽㪸㫅㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪋㩷
BLOWER FAN4 㪚㪟㪠㪧
㪫㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃㪄㪤㪘㪠㪥㩷㪘㪚㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃䌹㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪠㫅㫂㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㪠㪥㪢㪠㪛
㪡㪋㪍㪡㪉㪉㪜㪯㩷㪘㪚㪫㪋
㩷
㪚
㪫㪦㩷㪤㪠㪪㪚㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪩㪜㪭
㪡㪉㪈㪜㪯㩷㪘㪚㪫㪊
㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪣㪦㪫㪉㪡㪍㪠㪥㪢
㪡㪋㪌㪡㪋㪊㪤㪘㪠㪥㪄㪚㪥㪫㪚
㪫㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃㩷㫊㫋㪸㫅㪻㪄㪚㪥㪫㩷㪘㪚㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫐㪠㪥㪢㩷㪠㪛㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐㪪㪤㪘㪩㪫
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪄㪚㪥㪫㪡㪈㪐㪜㪯㩷㪘㪚㪫㪉
㩷㪚㪟㪠㪧
㪚㪪㪼㫉㫀㪸㫃㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪧㪣㪫㪶㪟㪈㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪡㪈㪎㪜㪯㩷㪘㪚㪫㪈
㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪣㪦㪫㪊㪠㫅㫂㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㪠㪥㪢㪠㪛
㪦㫉㫀㪾㫀㫅㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼
㪧㫃㫋㪶㪟㪼㪸㫋
㪡㪉㪧㪣㪫㪶㪠㪥㪈㪡㪉㪇㪡㪉㪈㪡㪈㪇㪡㪈㪐
㪤
㪧㪣㪫㪶㪟㪉㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪡㪉㪌㪜㪯㩷㪛㪚㩷㪦㪬㪫
㪡㪎㪠㪥㪢
㪦㫇㫇㫆㫊㫀㫋㪼㩷
㫊㫀㪻㪼
㪡㪌
㪟㪜㪘㪫㪜㪩㪘㪚㪄㪦㪬㪫㪧㪦㪮㪄㪦㪥㪫㪦㩷㪤㪘㪠㪥㪚㪥㪫㪄㪡㪚䇭㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪧㫃㫋㪶㪟㪼㪸㫋㩷㩷㩷㩷㪚㪥㪫㪄㪩㪣㪰
㪧㪩㪜㪶㪟㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪩㪜㪣㪘㪰㪘㪚㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪡㪉㪉㪘㪚㪄㪠㪥㪡㪬㪥㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪧㪦㪮㪡㪏㪡㪉㪛㪚㩷㪧㪦㪮
㪠㪥㪢㩷㪠㪛㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐㪪㪤㪘㪩㪫
㪦㫉㫀㪾㫀㫅㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼㪧㪩㪜㪶㪟㪼㪸㫋㪡㪎㪚㪟㪠㪧
㪧㪩㪜㪶㪟㪉㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪤㪘㪠㪥㪄㪚㪥㪫㩷㫊㪼㫉㫀㪸㫃㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪦㫇㫇㫆㫊㫀㫋㪼㩷㪘㪚㪶㪠㪥㪈㪡㪈㪡㪉㪊㪜㪯㪫㪄㪘㪚㪄㪦㪬㪫㪫㪦㩷㪡㪬㪥㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㪡㪐㪡㪊㫋㫆㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫
㫊㫀㪻㪼㪧㪩㪜㪶㪟㪼㪸㫋㪡㪏
㪠㪥㪢㪠㪛
㪘㪝㪫㪶㪟㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪠㫅㫂㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼
㪰
㪦㫉㫀㪾㫀㫅㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼㪘㪝㪫㪶㪟㪼㪸㫋㪡㪎㩷㪩㪜㪣㪘㪰㩷㪙㪡㪈㪏㪜㪯㩷㪪㪣㪦㪫㪈
㪡㪐㪚㪥㪫㪄㪩㪣㪰㩷㫋㪸㫇㪼㩷㫎㫀㫉㪼㪝㪼㪼㪻㪶㪬㫅㫀㫋㪶㪦㪝㪝㪶㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㩷㫌㫊㪼㪀
㪦㫇㫇㫆㫊㫀㫋㪼㩷㪘㪝㪫㪶㪟㪼㪸㫋㪝㪜㪜㪛㪶㪪㪡㪊
㫊㫀㪻㪼㪝㪼㪼㪻㪶㪬㫅㫀㫋㪶㪦㪥㪶㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㩷㫌㫊㪼㪀㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪣㪦㪫㪋㪡㪏㪠㪥㪢
㪧㪣㪫㪶㪫㪈㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪡㪍㩷㪩㪜㪣㪘㪰㩷㪘
㫋㫆㩷㪚㪥㪫㩷㩷㪡㪊㪡㪉㪇㪜㪯㩷㪪㪣㪦㪫㪉
㪦㫉㫀㪾㫀㫅㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼㪧㪣㪫㪶㫋㪿㫉㫄㪡㪈㪉㪩㫆㫃㫃㫀㫅㪾㪶㪬㫅㫀㫋㪶㪦㪥㪶㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㩷㫌㫊㪼㪀㪪㪬㪙㩷㪫㪘㪥㪢㪈㪡㪈㪈
㪮㪠㪥㪛㪶㪪㪡㪌㪩㫆㫃㫃㫀㫅㪾㪶㪬㫅㫀㫋㪶㪦㪝㪝㪶㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㩷㫌㫊㪼㪀
㪧㪣㪫㪶㪫㪉㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪡㪈㪉㪪㪤㪘㪩㪫㩷㪚㪘㪩㪛㪪㪬㪙㩷㪫㪘㪥㪢㪉
㪦㫇㫇㫆㫊㫀㫋㪼㩷㪧㪣㪫㪶㫋㪿㫉㫄㪉㪡㪈㪊㪡㪋㪡㪉㪊㪜㪯㩷㪪㪣㪦㪫㪊㪡㪈㪉
㫊㫀㪻㪼㪮㪠㪥㪛㪶㪤㪡㪋㪮㫀㫅㪻㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㩷㫌㫊㪼㪀
㪧㪩㪜㪶㪫㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪪㪬㪙㩷㪫㪘㪥㪢㪊
㪡㪈㪈㪛㪜㪙㪬㪞㪡㪈㪊
㪧㪩㪜㪶㫋㪿㫉㫄㪡㪈㪌㪡㪉㪋㪜㪯㩷㪪㪣㪦㪫㪋
㪘㪝㪫㪶㪫㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪡㪍 Heater Control board 㪝㪜㪜㪛㪶㪤㪡㪉㪝㪼㪼㪻㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㩷㫌㫊㪼㪀㪪㪬㪙㩷㪫㪘㪥㪢㪋㪡㪈㪋
㪘㪝㪫㪶㫋㪿㫉㫄㪡㪈㪎㪩㪣㪰㪄㪘㪚㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪡㪐㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪣㪦㪫㪌
㪪㪬㪙㩷㪫㪘㪥㪢㪌㪡㪈㪌
㪡㪈㪊㪩㪪㪭㩷㪠㪥㪈
㪧㪣㪠㪶㪉㪚㫆㫆㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㪽㪸㫅㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㪡㪈㪇㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪣㪦㪫㪍㪪㪬㪙㩷㪫㪘㪥㪢㪍
㪡㪈㪍㪡㪈㪍
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐㪚㫆㫆㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㪽㪸㫅㩿㪉㪋㪭㪀㪩㪪㪭㩷㪦㪬㪫㪈
㪛㩷㩷㩷㪘㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐
㪡㪈㪋㪛
㪡㪈㪏㪘㪝㪫㪶㪉㪚㪦㪦㪣㪠㪥㪞㪶㪝㪘㪥㪡㪈㪇
㪡㪈㪍㪩㪪㪭㩷㪠㪥㪉
㪡㪈㪐㪩㪜㪭㪶㪈㪤㪠㪪㪫㩷㪝㪘㪥㪈㪅㪉㪡㪈㪈㪧㫆㫊㫋㩷㪿㪼㪸㪻㪼㫉㩷㪸㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㪩㪪㪭㩷㪦㪬㪫㪉

㪡㪈㪌
㪡㪉㪇㪩㪜㪭㪶㪉㪤㪠㪪㪫㩷㪝㪘㪥㪊㪅㪋㪡㪈㪉㪜㪯㩷㪫㪟㪜㪩㪤㪈

㪡㪈㪎
㪜㪯㩷㪫㪟㪜㪩㪤㪉
㪡㪈㪏
㩻㪉㪊㪋㪌㪍㪎㪏
1
VJ-1204E Maintenance Manual Supplement Carriage Assy
Carriage Assy
Exploded View Height switching flag CR_ENC ASSY CR encoder assembly Pan-head screw with spring washer
DF-48668 DF-48986 DF-48633 and flat washer (polished) M2x6, Ni-3
MS-05020061
Height adjusting cam
DE-36570
E type fixing ring E-3 Pan-head screw with spring washer
Head tube specifications
MS-8003000A and flat washer M3x8, Ni-3 Pinch roller spacer BA
TB-40059 Configuration Qty of
MS-05030081 Part name Remarks
diagram tube used
Height switching lever CR_ENC mounting plate
Cursor roller shaft V Head tube Y1 DF-48713 Ǿ2 L=295mm 1
DE-36571 DF-48669
Cursor TB-49142 Bearing 684ZZ Head tube Y2 DF-48716 Ǿ2 L=300mm 1
DE-12573 DF-48917
Height switching cam Head tube Bk DF-49319 Ǿ2 L=250mm 2
DE-36581 Cursor shaft C BA Head tube C DF-49320 Ǿ2 L=270mm 2
Height switching TB-40003
lever spring Height switching shaft Head tube M DF-49323 Ǿ2 L=280mm 2
DF-48673 DF-48667 SE ring SE-3
MS-8403000A Head tube Y1_Assy‫ޓ‬DF-49036
Pan-head screw with spring washer Photo interrupter SG2481 Cursor roller shaft V Head tube Y2_Assy‫ޓ‬DF-49037
and flat washer M3x8, Ni-3 Head unit pushing spring TB-49142
E-SG2481 Head tube Bk_Assy‫ޓ‬DF-49472
MS-05030081 DE-36582
Head tube C_Assy‫ ޓ‬DF-49473
CR_HP sensor, Lever sensor Bearing 684ZZ Head tube M_Assy‫ޓ‬DF-49474
Cap DF-49471 DF-48917 ‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬ω
DF-49501‫ޓޓ‬
Pan-head screw with spring washer Pinch roller spacer BA Cut Ink tube 2.0BK to an appropriate
Backing-plate CR board cover
Lock kicker and flat washer M3x8, Ni-3 TB-40059 length.
Cutter solenoid assembly receiver spring DE-22166
DE-36579 MS-05030081 Roller shaft l 3-way joint 2-2*2
DF-42234 DF-48672
DF-49688 Three-way joint 2-2x2
DF-48665
Cutter solenoid assembly PE DE-36785
Cursor roller spring Height adjusting cam P tight cup M3x8, Ni-3
DE-34142 MS-59030081
Cutter solenoid spring BA DF-48671 DE-36570
TB-40155 Solenoid spring assembly
Backing-plate receiver Roller arm Hexagon bearing
DF-49062 DE-36568 DF-48666
DE-22228 Height switching Bearer fixing material
Cutter holder cap SE ring SE-3
DE-36768‫ޓޓ‬ Solenoid relay assembly cam DF-48670 Tapping screw M3x8,
DF-49003 MS-8403000A DE-36581
Tapping screw M3x8, EMI mounting S tight cup
Pan-head screw with Roller arm assembly Bearing 684ZZ E type fixing ring E-3 material MS-5203008A
MS-8003000A S tight cup
spring washer and flat Cutter solenoid relay assembly Blast adjusting piece DF-49065 DF-48917 Joint screw M6 DF-49491
MS-5203008A
washer M3x8, Ni-3 DE-48781 DE-36772 Ink tube 2.0BK DE-49738 DF-49778
MS-05030081 ‫ޓޓޓޓ‬ωAfter cutting to a proper length Three-way joint lid
Cutter holder Damper holder DF-49590
Carriage assembly Head tube Y1 DF-48713
DE-12578 DE-22163 O-ring M6 (butyl rubber) Bearer mounting
DF-49685 Head tube Y2 DF-48716 CR board assembly
P tight cup screw M3x6, Ni-3 Head pressure plate Head tube Bk DF-49319 DF-46476 material (VJ)
DE-12575 DF-49659
MS-59030061 Head tube C DF-49320 DE-22227
P_EDGE sensor assembly Head tube M DF-49323 O-ring M6 (butyl rubber) Tapping screw M3x8,
DF-48630 DF-46476 CR board
S tight cup
Joint screw M6 assembly
P_EDGE_ASSY P-EDGE Head pushing spring MS-5203008A
DF-49778 DE-36800
DF-48983 mounting plate DF-48674 Tube fixing material
DE-36597 DE-36578
Head holding piece Insulation film
Pan-head screw DE-36576 Connect to
with spring washer and flat Clamp RMS-1VO DF-48682
Damper assembly DF-48558
washer M3x8, Ni-3 Pan-head screw with spring Print head DF-42110
Print head assembly
MS-05030081 washer and flat washer M 3x6 DF-49485 DF-49684 Cable cover L
Damper assembly MS-0503006A Head tap wire DE-22165
DF-46678 Binding head machine DF-48619
screw M3x5, Ni-3bk
Damper assembly O-ring (butyl rubber) MS-1103005C
DF-42110 DF-46390 CR base
Head FG assmbly DE-12576
Pan-head screw with spring washer
DF-49018 Head FG plate and flat washer M3x8, Ni-3
DE-36575 MS-05030081 Edge saddle
Head FG cable assembly (EDS-1208U)
DF-48782 E-EDS-1208U
Head frame spring Pan-head screw with
Tapping screw M3x6, S tight cup
DF-48675 spring washer and flat
MS-5203006A PG origin sensor
washer M3x8, Ni-3
Head protective material Head cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49017 terminal assembly
Backing-plate receiver MS-05030081
DE-36769 Two head cables are required for DF-48635
DE-36572
full replacement.
and flat washer M3x8, Ni-3 Tapping screw M3x8, S tight cup PG origin sensor relay assembly
MS-05030081 MS-5203008A DF-49001
MS-5203006A
Pan-head screw with spring Cable cover R
Head adjusting cam DE-12577
washer and flat washer M 3x6
DE-36573
MS-0503006A
Slant adjusting plate
Head pushing plate spring
DF-49141
Head mounting plate Absorber H
DE-22162
Carriage Assy
DF-49136
DE-12574 2006.06.29 Rev.B Model Name: VJ-1204E
2
VJ-1204E Maintenance Manual Supplement CR Assy1
CR Assy1
Exploded View
CR motor assembly CR belt A0‫ޓ‬DF-49045
DE-36535
CR belt Tube holder
(Assembled parts)
DE-36545 DE-36539
Cable guide A0
Cup screw
DE-12559
M4x8 Ni-3
MS-06040081
Tapping screw M4x16, MS-5204006A Tapping screw M3x6, S tight cup
S tight cup MS-5203006A
MS-5204016A CR motor mounting plate fixing material
CR motor assembly DF-48591
DF49021
Y rail mounting material L
Y rail side plate L
CR motor mounting plate DE-36530
DE-36538
DE-36537
Flat clamp FCR35
Flanged hexagon nut M4 (serrated)
E-FCR-35-V0
T fence spring MS-9704000A
DF-48596 CR motor assembly CNT to JC power cable assembly
Pan-head screw with spring washer DF-49891
DE-36535
CR motor relay assembly and flat washer M4x8
DF-48992 MS-5204008A Pan-head screw with spring washer Hearter junction board assembly
Driven pulley shaft and flat washer M4x8 DG-40135
CR motor cable A0 assembly Y rail eccentric screw
DF-48623 DE-48592 MS-5204008A Flat washer (polished) M8
DF-48585
MS-8708000A
Stop rubber BA CR driven pulley assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49047
Y rail eccentric screw
TB-40010 DF-48585
Flat washer (polished) M8 Bearing 684ZZ
T fence spring assembly
MS-8708000A DF-48917 Flanged hexagon nut M4 (serrated) Tapping screw M3x6,
DF-49026
MS-9704000A S tight cup
Bearing holder CR driven pulley Y rail mounting MS-5203006A
Pressure locating material L
DF-48594 DF-48593 material R
DE-36529
DE-36528 Cup screw
Tension adjusting plate
M3 x 6 Zn-CM2
DF-48600
MS-0603006A
Y rail A0
DE-36543 CR belt spring
DF-48595
Pressure locating material L2 Tension fixing spring
DF-49499 DE-36555
Y rail mounting material L2 Pan-head machine screw M4x30
DF-48586 MS-0104030A
Pressure locating material R
Pan-head screw with DE-36553
spring washer and flat T fence A0
washer M4x8 DE-22144 Driven pulley base
MS-5204008A DE-36554
CR origin sensor cable assembly
Pressure bracket T fence A0_assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49025 DF-48634
DE-22141
Pressure spring 6.9N Photo interrupter SG2481
DG-40139 Pressure arm shaft VJ E-SG2481
Pressure cam
DF-48581 DE-36767
Pressure spring‫ޓ‬DF-49691 Fence guide Clamp RMS-1VO
DE-36540 DF-48558
Lever sensor cable assembly
Pressure arm assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49052 Fence guide assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49027 CRT board bracket
DF-48639
Pressure bush 13 DE-36887
DF-47446 Lever sensor cable assembly
Pressure arm
CR origin sensor relay assembly DF-49004
DE-22142
DF-49000
Pressure roller
Y rail side plate R
DF-49583 Tapping screw M4x16,
Pressure roller shaft DE-36525 Pan-head screw with spring CNT to JC cable assembly
S tight cup
DF-48584 washer and flat washer M4x8 DG-40136
MS-5204016A
MS-5204008A Heater junction board assembly
Pressure roller assembly Photo interrupter SG2481 DE-36762
DF-49053 CR_HP sensor, Lever sensor E-SG2481
DF-49471 Pressure locating material R2
Pressure roller shaft assembly E-ring (JIS) E-6 DE-36797
Pressure lever spring MS-800600A Roller guide A0
DF-49054 DE-36544
DF-48587
Pressure lever
CR Assy 1
DE-12558
2006.05.31 Rev.A Model Name : VJ-1204E
3
VJ-1204E Maintenance Manual Supplement CR Assy2
CR Assy2
Exploded View Ink tube 2.0BK (Unit: m)‫ޓ‬DE-49738

‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬ωAfter cut in specified length
Ink tube VJ-Bk‫ޓ‬DF-49707 CR tube‫ޓ‬DF-49701
Ink tube VJ-C‫ޓ‬DF-49708
Tube clamp
Ink tube VJ-M‫ޓ‬DF-49709 Tube clamp‫ޓ‬DF-49694 DE-36786
Ink tube VJ-Y‫ޓ‬DF-49710 Five tube clamps are required for
full replacement.
Tube holder
Electrically conductive cloth tape DE-36539
DF-49498
CR cable A0_assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49016
Three CR cables are required for
full replacement.
CR tape wire A0
DF-48618
Steel bearer A0_assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49043
Steel bearer A0
DE-36585
and flat washer M3x6
MS-0503006A
Tube guide A0_assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49040 Bearer holder

DF-48603
Tube guide film A0

DE-22168
Bearer cushion
DF-49503

MS-5203006A
Head tube specifications
Cable guide A0 Configuration Qty of
DE-12559 Part name Remarks
diagram tube used
Ink tube VJ-Bk DF-49707 Ǿ2 L=1850mm 1
Ink tube VJ-C DF-49708 Ǿ2 L=1810mm 1
Ink tube VJ-M DF-49709 Ǿ2 L=1780mm 1
Ink tube VJ-Y DF-49710 Ǿ2 L=1710mm 1
Flat clamp FCR35

E-FCR-35-V0
CR Assy 2
4
VJ-1204E Maintenance Manual Supplement PF Assy
PF Assy
Exploded View Pan-head screw with spring washer

MS-0504008A Tapping screw M3x6, S tight cup
MS-5203006A
and flat washer (polished) M2x6, Ni-3
MS-05020061
Slit guide
TB-30235 PF bracket
DE-36656
Tapping screw M3x8, P tight cup

MS-5903008A
PF_ENC_A0_ASSY Media Guide Assy
DF-48985
PF_ENC scale assembly

DF-49028
Tapping screw M3x8,
P tight cup PF encoder mounting plate t2
MS-0503008A DF-49510 Tapping screw M3x6
MS-5203006A
PF encoder A1assembly
DF-48632 Tapping screw M3x6, S tight cup
MS-0503006A Bearing holder
Speed reduction pulley assembly DF-48547
DF-49051
ENC holder
DF-48550 PF motor assembly Bearing
PF_ENC scale
DF-49020 DF-48546
DE-36501
Speed reduction pulley
DE-36500 PF motor 2 C-ring (jig) JG-20
DE-36625 MS-8220000A
Timing belt
DF-48551
Grid roller A0
DE-22143
X reduction belt assembly

DF-49046 PF motor cable A0 assembly
DF-48621
PF motor relay A0_assembly

Intermediate roller bearing
DF-48990 Cursor roller 603ZZY04 DF-42688
DF-44197
PF cover
DE-12571 E-ring (JIS) 2.5
Pan-head screw with MS-8002500A
Sliding bearing
spring washer and flat washer M3x6 DF-48545
MS-5203006A
MS-0503008A
Hexagon socket head screw Pan-head screw with

with spring washer and spring washer and flat washer M3x8
flat washer M3x6, Ni-3 MS-0503008A
MS-35030061
Grit medium tray, VJ

Grit medium tray stay, VJ DF-49712
Frame Assy DF-49711
Intermediate support, VJ
MS-5203006A
PF Assy
2006.05.29 Rev.A Model Name: VJ-1204E
5
VJ-1204E Maintenance Manual Supplement Frame Assy
Frame Assy
Exploded View
T Frame L Pan-head screw with flat washer (polished) M4x20

DE-22153 MS-0304020A

MS-5203006A
F Frame L
DE-22151
Free bush 2
DF-49433
Tapping screw M4x6, S tight cup Handle t1.6

Suction fan cable 4 assembly‫ޓ‬DF-48997
MS-5204006A DF-48565

Frame A0 Tapping screw M4x6, S tight cup
Suction fan cable 4 assembly DE-12729 MS-5204006A
DF-48628
Handle t1.6
DF-48565
Rubber leg
DF-48567 R Frame B
Free bush 1
Pan-head machine screw M4x8 DE-22155
DF-49432
Suction fan cable 3 assembly MS-0104008A
Suction fan cable 1 assembly
DF-48627 DF-48625
Pan-head screw E type fixing ring E-2 MS-8002000A
Suction fan cable 2 assembly with flat washer
(polished) M4x20 Arm shaft assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49061
DF-48626
MS-0304020A Shaft DF-49133
Frame seal Lock arm spring Assy‫ޓ‬DF-49060
Pan-head screw with spring washer DF-48698
Lock arm spring DF-48563
and flat washer (polished) M4x40
MS-0504040A Lock arm Assy‫ޓ‬DF-49059
Pan-head machine screw M4x5, Ni-3
Lock arm 2 DE-36654
MS-01040051
Lock bracket DF-49134
Mini-clamp (MN-2)
E-MN-2 T Frame R
Fan duct
Rubber leg DE-22154
Suction fan DE-35167
DF-48567
DE-35166
Pan-head screw with

Suction fan DF-46328
flat washer (polished)
Total: 4 parts F Frame R
M4x20
DE-22152
MS-0304020A
Suction FAN mounting plate Tapping screw M4x6, S tight cup

DE-36788 FFC seal
MS-5204006A
DF-48722

MS-5203006A Frame Assy
MS-5203006A
6
VJ-1204E Maintenance Manual Supplement Media guide Assy
Media guide Assy
Exploded View Origin side : PLT_H1 cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49675 Origin side : PLT_T1 cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49679
Opposite side : PLT_H2 cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49676 Opposite side : PLT_T2 cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49680
To HEATER-RELAY board To HEATER-RELAY board
To platen heater
Origin side : PLT_H1 cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49634 Origin side : PLT_T1 cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49638
Opposite side : PLT_H1 cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49635 Opposite side : PLT_T2 cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49639
Platen heater, 100‫ޓ‬DF-49696 To platen thermistor
Four platen heaters are required for full replacement. PRE_H cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49677
Platen stay R Platen heater, 100‫ޓ‬DF-49696
Platen seal 1
DE-36779 Two platen heaters are required for full replacement.
DE-36781
To HEATER-RELAY board
Platen seal 2
DF-49589 Thermistor assembly PRE_H cable assembly
EA-47711 Antireflection sheet DF-49636
Platen stay F To pre heater
DE-36778 DF-49644
Thermistor assembly‫ޓ‬DF-46639 PRE_T cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49681
Platen 2 machining diagram To HEATER-RELAY board
DE-36874
Media guide R1, A0
DE-36777
Platen heater, 100 PRE_T cable assembly
Hexagon socket head screw with spring washer DE-36791 DF-49640
and flat washer M3x6, Ni-3 To pre thermistor
MS-35030061
Media guide R2, A0

Heat insulator platen, 100 DE-12725 P_REAR sensor assembly‫ޓ‬DF-48982
DF-49618
Nut plate Thermistor holder
DF-49588 DF-46468 Cup screw M3x6, Ni-3bk
Shoulder screw M3x8 MS-0603006C
AFT_H cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49678 DF-49863
Thermistor assembly
EA-47711
To HEATER-RELAY board assembly Shoulder screw M3x5 Cup screw M2x6, Ni-3
Tapping screw M3x6, S tight cup DF-49862 MS-06020061
MS-5203006A
AFT_H cable assembly
To after heater DF-49637 Cup screw M3x6, Ni-3bk
MS-0603006C Tapping screw M3x6,
AFT_T cable assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49682 S tight cup
Platen heater, 100 MS-5203006A
To HEATER-RELAY
board assembly DE-36791
AFT_T cable assembly PE sensor plate P_PEAR sensor assembly

DF-49641 DF-48561 DF-48629
To after thermistor
Cup screw M3x6, Ni-3bk
MS-0603006C
MS-0603006C
Media guide stay b

DE-12722
Media guide F left cover
DE-36784 Thermistor assembly
EA-47711
Media guide stay a
Cup screw M3x6, Ni-3bk DE-12721
MS-0603006C
Media guide support
DE-36782
Media guide F upper
DE-12723
Preheater, 100
DE-36792 Preheater, 100‫ޓ‬DF-49695
Two preheaters are required for full replacement.
Media guide F lower Media guide F right cover
DE-12724 DE-36783
Media guide/Platen Assy
MS-0603006C 2006.05.31 Rev.A Model Name : VJ-1204E
7
VJ-1204E Maintenance Manual Supplement Cartridge Assy
Cartridge Assy
Exploded View O ring M6

DF-46671
Joint screw M6
DE-49778
For Y O ring M6 (butyl rubber)

DF-46476
Joint (BK)
DF-49992
For K, C, and M O ring M6 (butyl rubber) Holder pressure spring‫ޓ‬DF-43967
DF-46476 Two holder pressure springs are required
Ink ID board
Joint screw M6 DF-43968 for full replacement.
Joint screw M6
DE-49778 DE-49778
O ring M6 Joint screw M6 Tapping screw M3x6, S tight cup

(butyl rubber) Cartridge pipe B DE-49778 MS-5203006A
DF-46476 DF-48684 P tight cup screw M3x6, Ni-3
O ring M6 (butyl rubber) MS-59030061
DF-46476
Joint (BK)
DF-49992
O ring M6 Holder guide I/C upper
O ring M6 IC holder mounting plate
(butyl rubber) DF-42113
DF-46671 DE-12821
DF-46476
Joint screw M6
DE-49778 Holder Pressure spring
DF-42552
Torsion spring 3490

DF-42116
CARD board holder
DE-35048
Cartridge pipe A
INK ID board assembly
DF-48683
DF-48529
Joint screw M6
DE-49778 Tapping screw M3x14, S tight cup
MS-52030141
O ring M6 (butyl rubber)
DF-46476
Tapping screw M3x6, S tight cup S tight bind screw

MS-5203006A M2x8 Zn-CM2 Absorber holder I/C
MS-51012008A DF-42118 IH cap
DE-36886
Frame assembly, hook assembly

DF-46700
Tape 20*22
DF-42119
Frame assembly, hook (oil-based)
DF-44766 Ink cable assembly (VJ12)
Tapping screw M3x10, S tight cup DF-49893
MS-5203010A
Ink cable assembly (VJ12)

DG-40138
I/C holder lower

DE-22265 Cartridge base
DE-22135
Cartridge Assy
8
VJ-1204E Maintenance Manual Supplement Maintenance Assy
Maintenance Assy
Exploded View Flushing tray

Tapping screw M3x6, S tight cup MS-5203006A
Flushing frame
MS-5203006A DF-48553
Cleaner head assembly
Flushing absorber DF-49687
DF-49591
Flushing absorber‫ޓ‬DF-49698
Flushing box
Maintenance base 1
DE-22229
DE-36746 Cap
DF-49690
Flushing box‫ޓ‬DF-49697
Cleaner head
Tapping screw M3x8, P tight cup Cap head
Waste fluid guide 2 DF-49487
MS-5903008A DF-49486
DE-36675
Cap spring
Waste fluid guide lid Maintenance assembly DF-49455
Clamp 2SV0
DE-36676 DF-49686
DF-47183
Cap slider
DE-12696
Clamp RMS-1VO
DF-48558 Frame, cap
DE-12720
Clamp RMS-1V0
MS-5203006A Maintenance base 2
DE-22214 Wiper origin sensor cable
Absorber B
DF-48556 assembly
DF-48636
Clamp RMS-1V0
DF-48558
Absorber A
DF-48555
Frame Assembly
Pump cap assembly

DF-48652
Wiper origin relay assembly
DF-49002
MS-5203006A
Pump motor cable
assembly
Waste fluid mounting plate Pump motor cable assembly DF-48993
DF-48557 DE-48624

MS-5203006A
Absorber C
DF-49327 Waste fluid box sensor cable
̪ Attach to Frame Assembly assembly
DF-48637
Waste fluid sensor relay assembly
DF-48987
Photo interrupter
E-OS-3205A-N2
Waste fluid cassette
DE-22223
Maintenance Assy
9
VJ-1204E Maintenance Manual Supplement Cover Assy
Cover Assy
Front cover receiver

Exploded View DE-36499
Front cover A0
Front cover receiver assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49056
DE-12556
F cover flag Six front cover receivers are required for full replacement.
DF-49230
Top cover A0
DE-12554
Slotted pin A type 3x10
MS-5204008A
F cover flag rubber
DF-49222

Front cover buffer MS-0503005A
DF-49236 Panel Sheet
DE-36550
Scroller FG plate L
DF-48544 Panel unit assembly
Roll receiver L assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49067 DF-48977
Tapping screw M4x12, P tight binding (black)
Side cover L MS-5804012B Panel unit
DE-12551 DE-22147
Scroller receiver roller
DF-48542 Scroller receiver roller assembly DF-49063 F cover flag
Three scroller receiver rollers are required DF-49230 FFC cushion
for each scroller receiver full replacement. DF-49502
Scroller receiver L F cover flag rubber
DE-22131 DF-49222 Slotted pin A type 3x10 Panel stay
logo plate Front cover buffer DF-49231 DE-22146
DF-45873 DF-49236
Hand rubber, VJ Scroller receiver roller
Tapping screw M3x6, DF-49718 DF-48542
S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Scroller FG plate R
MS-5203006A
DF-48543
Roll receiver R assembly
DF-49066 Panel tape wire
Cover L sensor A0_assembly ‫ޓ‬DF-49013 DF-48616
Scroller receiver R P tight binding screw M4x10, Ni-3
DE-22130 MS-58040101 Panel cable assembly
Sensor cover L DF-49014
DE-22128
Sensor cover L assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49057

Cover L sensor A0 assembly Tapping screw M4x12 P tight bind
DF-48642 MS-5804012B
Pressure lever cap I/H cover VJ

Tapping screw M3x6, S tight cup DE-36552 DE-12726
MS-5203006A
Tapping screw M4x8,

S tight cup
MS-5204008A
Sensor cover R assembly ‫ޓ‬DF-49058

Absorber R
DF-49229
Cover R sensor assembly‫ޓ‬DF-49011

Side cover R
Sensor cover R
DE-12552
DE-22129
Cover R sensor assembly
DF-48640
MS-5204008A
Cover Assy
10
VJ-1204E Maintenance Manual Supplement Board Assy
Board Assy
Terminal block to MAIN AC cable assembly

Exploded View DF-49624 Fuse to terminal block AC cable assembly
Terminal block MAIN AC cable assembly DF-49623
Pan-head screw
Bush OLBT-26 DF-49665 with spring washer
DF-47187 Terminal block and flat washer (small)
E-RTK-10M-4P M38
MS-04030008A
Terminal block to CNT AC cable assembly
RLY to AC cable assembly DF-49626
DF-49670 To MAIN board
Terminal block to CNT AC cable assembly
DF-49667 To fuse holder
RLY to AC cable assembly To HEATER CONTROL board
DF-49629
CNT to RLY AC cable assembly Noise filter cable A0 assembly Fuse to terminal block AC cable assembly
DF-49668 DF-48729 DF-49664
CNT to RLY AC cable assembly To power board Pan-head screw with spring
Bush OLBT-13 Noise filter cable A0_assembly
DF-49627 washer and flat washer
DF-47186 DF-49006 (polished) M330 Ni-3
CNT to power AC cable assembly MS-05030301
To HEATER RELAY board
DF-49673
Clamp RMS-1VO
Noise filter FG assembly Cooling FAN (24V)
DF-48558 7 CNT to power AC cable assembly To HEATER RELAY board
DF-49019 assembly
DF-49632 HEATER RELAY board assembly
DF-49022
Wiring guard DE-36764
Cup screw M36 Noise filter to fuse AC Cooling fan (24V) assembly
DE-36732 MS-0603006A Cup screw M36 cable assembly
To HEATER CONTROL board DF-46439
MS-0603006A DF-49622
CNT to RLY tape wire Fan seal
To power board DF-49628 Noise filter FG assembly DF-48699
Clamp 2SV0 CNT to power DC cable assembly DF-48725
MAIN to CNT serial cable assembly Noise filter to fuse AC
DF-47183 DF-49633 DC cable assembly
DF-49631 DC cable assembly cable assembly
To HEATER CONTROL board DF-48980
CNT to power DC cable assembly CNT to RLY tape wire DF-48615 DF-49663
MAIN to CNT serial cable assembly
DF-49674 DF-49672 DE-49628 Power board assembly
DF-48975
MAIN to CNT DC cable assembly HEATER RELAY
DF-49630 To power board board assembly Power board assembly
To HEATER DF-49661 DE-36583
MAIN to CNT DC cable assembly CONTROL board Fuse AC inlet, Large, 15A
Flat clamp FCR35 Cup screw M36 DF-48402
DF-49671 DF-49683
E-FCR-35-V0 MS-0603006A
To HEATER CONTROL board To MAIN board Fuse
To HEATER CONTROL board HEATER CONT board assembly E-F7165-250V15A
128MB SODIMM DF-49660 Clamp 2SV0
CR cable A0 assembly DF-49495 DF-47183
DF-49016
Cooling fan cable A0 assembly
To MAIN board
DF-48727 Cooling fan cable A0 assembly
CR tape wire A0 DF-48999
DF-48618
Cooling fan (24V) assembly Tapping screw M36
DF-49022 S tight cup
MAIN boad assembly HEATER CONT board assembly MS-5203006A
DE-36766 Cooling fan (5V) assembly DE-36760
DF-48724 Fuse holder
Clamp 2SV0 E-F-66BD
Cup screw M36 DF-47183
MS-0603006A Fan bracket 3
MAIN to CNT power cable assembly DE-36621 Fuse holder
DF-49900 E-F-66AD AC inlet, Large, 15A
Pan-head machine DF-48115
MAIN to CNT cable assembly M430
MS-0104030A Power bracket Cup screw
DG-40137 To HEATER CONTROL board
DE-22233 M36 Zn-CM2
MS-0603006A
MAIN board assembly Controller board bracket
DF-49658 DE-22266
Connector panel 2 Tapping screw M36
To MAIN board DE-36620 S tight cup Pan-head screw with spring washer
Cooling fan assembly MS-5203006A and flat washer (polished) M36 Ni-3
DF-49023 MS-05030061
Tapping screw M36 Fan bracket 2
MAIN board bracket

DE-36889
S tight cup
MS-5203006A
DE-36789
Board Assy
11

Mutoh1204 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Mutoh1204 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

MAINTENANCE

Full-Colour Inkjet Printer

Use this manual for the maintenance

1. For Users in Europe

2. For Users in the United States

3. Trademark Mentioned in this Manual

• No part of this product or publication may be reproduced, copied, or

About this Manual

1. Purpose and Target Readers

Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the

Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the equipment

Indicates reference pages in this manual

General Table of Contents

1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.3 Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.4 Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.5 Operation Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

2.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.3 Part Names and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.4 Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

3.2 Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.3 Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.4 Options/Supplies List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.5 Choosing a Place for the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

4.2 Removal of Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

4.3 Replacement of Board Base Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

4.4 Replacement of PF Driving Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.5 Replacement of CR Driving Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

4.6 Replacement of Head Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

4.7 Replacement of Maintenance Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

4.8 Replacement of Ink Supply Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

4.9 Replacement of Frame Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

4.10 Replacement of Cable Guide Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

5.5 Inspection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

5.5.7 History Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

5.6 Ink Charging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5.7 Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

5.8 Cleaning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

5.9 Sample Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

5.10 Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

5.11 Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

5.12 Servo Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

5.13 Endurance Running Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

5.14 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

5.16 PaperInitial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69

6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.3 Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

7.2 Adjustment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7.3 Working with Dedicated Network Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

7.4 PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

7.5 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

7.6 CR Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

7.7 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

7.8 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

7.9 Cutter Holder Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

7.10 PG Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

7.11 Media Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

8.2 Periodical Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8.3 Part Life Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

8.4 Lubrication/Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6